SCM612 - APO Transportation Planning - Vehicle Scheduling (TP-VS)

I
n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SCM612 APO Transportation Planning and Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS)
APO Transportation
Planning / Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS)
APO Transportation
Planning / Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS)
SCM612
SCM612
! SAP AG 2002

! R/3 System Release 4.6C and APO Release 3.0A
! Collection 22
! Material number: 5005 7636
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Copyright 2002 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or for any purpose without the express permission of
SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
All rights reserved.
Copyright

Trademarks:
! Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
! Microsoft
, WINDOWS
, NT
, EXCEL
, Word
, PowerPoint
,
and SQL Server
are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
! IBM
, DB2
, OS/2
, DB2/6000
, Parallel Sysplex
, MVS/ESA
, RS/6000
, AIX
, S/390
, AS/400
,
OS/390
, and OS/400
are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

! ORACLE
is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

! INFORMIX
-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX
Dynamic Server
TM
are registered trademarks of
Informix Software Incorporated.
! UNIX
, X/Open
, OSF/1
, and Motif
are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

! HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C
, World Wide Web

Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
! JAVA
is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

! JAVASCRIPT
is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology
invented and implemented by Netscape.
! SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, ABAP, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow,
SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo, and mySAP.com
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over
the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Course Prerequisites
# Required Prerequisites:
! LO611 Transportation
! AP010 APO Overview
# Recommended:
! Knowledge of Supply Chain Theory
! Knowledge of basic transportation planning
and execution processes
! AP205 APO Master Data Integration
! LO610 Delivery Processes

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Target Audience
# Participants
! Project team members responsible for the
implementation of APO TP/VS
! SAP consultants and SAP partners
# Duration: 3 days

User notes:
! These training materials are not a teach-yourself program. They complement the explanations
provided by your course instructor. Space is provided on each page for you to note down additional
information.
! There may not be sufficient time during the course to complete all the exercises. The exercises provide
additional examples that are covered during the course. You can also work through these examples in
your own time to increase your understanding of the topics.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 1-1
! SAP AG 2002
! Course Goals
! Course Objectives
! Course Content
! Main Business Scenario
Contents:
Course Overview

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Course Goal
This course will provide you with:
! An introduction to the APO tool and its various
components
! An understanding of the Master Data requirements
and integration between APO TP/VS and an R/3
System (or other external system)
! Detailed knowledge of the Transportation Planning/
Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component of APO

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Use the TP/VS component of APO to plan both
inbound and outbound shipments.
! Create the necessary integration models to
communicate data between an R/3 System and
the APO TP/VS component.
! Make the necessary customizing settings
required to perform transportation planning,
vehicle scheduling, and carrier selection in the
TP/VS environment
! Use the various monitoring tools available to
TP/VS
Course Objectives
At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Course Content
Unit 1 Course Overview
Unit 2 Transportation
Processes Overview
Unit 3 R/3 Transportation
Processing Overview
Unit 4 APO Oveview
Unit 5 APO Integration and
Master Data
Unit 6 APO TP/VS Master Data
Unit 7 Models and Planning
Versions
Unit 8 Transfer of Transaction
Data
Unit 9 Monitoring and Error
Handling
Unit 10 Vehicle Scheduling (VS)
Basic Settings
Unit 11 Vehicle Scheduling (VS)
Unit 12 Carrier Selection
Unit 13 Additional Topics
Unit 14 TP/VS Monitoring
Unit 15 Conclusion

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! As a member of the project team of a company that
manufactures and sells computers and related
components, you are responsible for the
implementation of the APO TP/VS component that
is to be interfaced with an SAP R/3 System.
! Your task is to integrate the APO TP/VS
environment with your R/3 System by making the
necessary customizing settings, creating the
Integration models to transfer the necessary master
and transaction data, and establishing the TP/VS
models to perform the short to intermediate
transportation planning for your company.
Main Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The Transportation Management System (TMS)
! R/3 System Logistics processes
! Transportation planning and execution with the R/3 System
! Transportation planning with TP/VS
Transportation Processes Overview
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Define processes related to transportation
planning
! Identify the R/3 System documents that are
related to transportation planning
! Understand planning in the R/3 System vs.
planning in APO TP/VS
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Transportation Processes: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! It is important to understand the fundamental
business processes related to transportation
planning and execution. These processes must be
viewed from a transportation planners perspective.
Transportation Processes : Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Logistics Execution and the Supply Chain
Production warehouse
Distribution center
Production facilities
Customer
Border
Vendor
Warehouse

" The Logistics Execution (LE) component models the logistics processes of a company. It covers the
entire process chain from the vendor through the warehouses, production facilities, and distribution
centers to the customer.
" These processes include:
$ The goods receipt process: Goods pickup from the vendor and putaway
$ The goods issue process: Picking and outbound delivery of the goods to the customer
$ Internal warehouse processes such as posting changes, stock transfers, and inventory
$ The transportation process: Inbound and outbound shipments and shipment cost calculation and
settlement
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
LES BW, SCEM
APO-TP/VS
(Planning)
(Execution)
(Monitoring)
Transportation Management System (TMS)

" Closed feedback loop between planning, execution, and monitoring.
" Fast and simple information exchange.
" Monitoring of all processes.
" Short and long term decision support.
" Together TP/VS, LES and BW, and Supply Chain Event Management deliver a comprehensive
solution for Transportation Management within Supply Chain Management.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
From plant to customer Outbound shipments
From plant to customer Outbound shipments
Transportation processing
refers to the shipment of
goods ...
refers to the shipment of
goods ...
From plant to plant Shipment for stock transfer
From plant to plant Shipment for stock transfer
From vendor to plant Inbound shipments
From vendor to plant Inbound shipments
Transportation Processing in R/3

" A shipment is a collection of inbound or outbound deliveries that are shipped together. The inbound or
outbound deliveries of the shipment have the same shipping characteristics.
" Effective transportation processing is required so that deliveries are shipped on time and are received
on schedule at the customer's site.
" The R/3 Transportation application component provides essential functions for transportation and
shipment cost processing for goods issues and goods receipts.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipments in R/3 Logistics Execution
PO
processing
Inbound
delivery
Goods
receipt
Invoice
verification
Sales order
processing
Outbound
delivery
Goods
issue
Billing
Inbound
shipment
Outbound
shipment
MM ordering
SD order processing
LE Logistics Execution
Vendor
Customer

" Inbound shipments are an integral part of the process chain in Procurement (MM Purchasing) and
are processed based on inbound deliveries. They are required for transportation planning.
" The basis of the procurement process is the purchase order. The subsequent document is the inbound
delivery that is used by the vendor to confirm the delivery. The inbound delivery is an R/3 document
and is created with reference to the purchase order.
" The inbound delivery is the basis for creating the inbound shipment (the shipment of the ordered
goods from the vendor to the company's plant).
" Goods receipt is then posted. Invoice verification completes the purchasing process.
" The basis of the Sales and Distribution (SD) process is the sales order. The subsequent document is the
outbound delivery, which documents the shipping of the goods.
" Outbound shipments are part of the SD process and are processed based on outbound deliveries.
" The outbound delivery is the basis for creating the outbound shipment (the shipment of the goods
from the company's plant to the customer).
" Goods issue is then posted and the invoice is created.
" Shipment documents can also be created for stock transfers between plants.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3 Transportation and Shipment Cost Processing
Create shipment
document
Process shipment:
planning & completion
Create shipment cost
document
Calculate shipment costs
Transfer shipment costs;
settle with service agent
Monitor shipment:
lists & shipment info
Shipment cost processing
Bill shipment costs
to customer

" R/3 transportation and shipment cost processing includes transportation processing, shipment cost
calculation, and shipment cost settlement.
" A shipment document is created based on the inbound or outbound deliveries.
" Other shipment processing activities include shipment planning and completion. The tasks are
associated with both planning and executing.
" Tools are available to support shipment monitoring during planning and execution. They include lists,
graphical transportation information, and the transportation information system (TIS).
" Shipment cost processing begins with the creation of the shipment cost document.
" The shipment costs are automatically calculated in this document.
" The costs are transferred so that accruals can be posted and assignments made in Controlling (CO).
" Settlement is completed with the service agents through the payment of the invoice or creation of a
credit memo.
" You can copy the costs resulting from the shipment and calculated in the shipment cost document into
customer billing documents, and thus include the costs of transportation in the customer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3 and APO Integration Architecture
Sales and
Distribution
FI / CO
APO
TP/VS
B usi nes s
War e hou se
Tra c kin g
Se rve r
Sales Orders
Deliveries and
Shipments
Materials
Management
Foreign
Trade
Transportation
Processing
Purchase Orders
Stock Transport Orders
Warehouse
Management
L
E
S
Account Determination
Freight Costs
Carrier Settlement
Customer Settlement
Goods Issue
Documentation
Import Data
Freight Costs
Inbound
Outbound
Freight Costs
Supply Chain
Event Manager

" Integrating APO TP/VS and R/3 provides the ability to perform short to intermediate term
transportation planning that optimizes the inbound and outbound transportation demand.
" In this scenario, TP/VS is used to perform the transportation planning and R/3 is used for transportation
execution.
" Additional functions, such as Event Manager and Business Warehouse reporting, can be provided in
the R/3 and APO architecture.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Management
Shipper Carrier Shipper /Carrier
Exchange
Transportation
Requirements
Collaborate on
Exceptions
Execute Shipment
Vehicle Scheduling
Create Orders
Vehicle Scheduling/
Transfer Data to R/3
Vehicle Scheduling/
Create Planned
Shipments Including
Planned
Deliveries
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Routing/Scheduling

" The target of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound or outbound transportation
demand between a plant/DC and different other locations, such as suppliers and customers. The
optimization covers the companys own fleet as well as carrier vehicles. Carrier selection can be
executed to select carriers based on least cost, business share, or priority.
" The Transportation Management scenario comprises the following main processes:
$ Document entry
$ Consolidation of transportation demand
$ Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
$ Carrier Selection
$ Collaborative Transportation Planning
$ Transfer Deliveries and Shipments to R/3
$ Execute Shipment in R/3 by picking and packing deliveries, goods issue posting, set status shipment
end, and archive shipments
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Exchange
Transportation
Requirements
Collaborate on
Exceptions
Vehicle Scheduling
Routing/Scheduling
Create Orders
Vehicle Scheduling/
Vehicle Scheduling/
Create Planned
Shipments incl. Planned
Deliveries
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Routing/Scheduling
Execute Shipment
Create Orders in R/3 System

" Different types of orders are first created in the R/3 system. These orders (sales orders, purchase orders,
stock transfer orders, and so on) build the transportation demand for APO TP/VS.
" Delivery and Shipment documents created in the R/3 system can also be used to build the
transportation demand.
" The transportation demand can be transferred from R/3 via integration model (CIF) into APO or is
generated directly in the APO system (for example, as a result of the TLB run). The ATP check is
performed out of the R/3 into APO for sales orders. Additional data is brought over from R/3 to APO
and stored in database tables. This additional information can then be used in the TMS-process for
special handling, instructions, compatibilities, and so on.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Planning: Outbound Process
Shipment
with
Deliveries
Orders
Create
Demands at Locations
Deliveries
Create
Planned Delivery Items
Add. Data
Add. Data
Create
Update
Update
- Selection
- Consolidation,
scheduling, and building
planned shipments
- Rescheduling of orders
- Carrier Selection
Plan material
and source
Checks
Checks
M
i
d
-
a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
t
e
r
m

o
p
t
i
m
i
z
a
t
i
o
n
Planned Shipments
including
Planned Deliveries resp.
Planned Delivery Items

" Sales orders, outbound deliveries, and shipments can be used to create transportation demand in
TP/VS.
" Using sales order data, TP/VS planning process creates planned delivery and shipment documents in
the R/3 system.
" The TP/VS planning process does not make any changes to the sales documents in the R/3 system.
" Generally, transportation-related changes made to an R/3 document are updated in the corresponding
TP/VS document.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Planning: Inbound Process
Shipment
with
Deliveries
Demands
Deliveries
Planned Shipments
including
Planned Deliveries
Create
Planned Delivery Items /
Purchase requisitions
Add. Data
Add. Data
Create
Update
Update
Group according to
planned shipments
Production planning
and sourcing
Checks
Checks
M
i
d

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
t
e
r
m

o
p
t
i
m
i
z
a
t
i
o
n
Purchase Orders
Checks
Create
Update
Purchase
Requisiton
Create
Add. Data

" Purchase Orders, Stock Transport Orders, Inbound Deliveries, and Shipment documents are used to
plan inbound transportation demand.
" When Purchase Orders/Stock Transport Orders are provided to TP/VS for planning, TP/VS will create
the Inbound Delivery and Inbound Shipment document data for the R/3 System.
" Transportation demands from Supply Network Planning (SNP) are also created in TP/VS for planning.
" Transportation-relevant changes made to an R/3 document are updated in the corresponding TP/VS
document.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Planning: Change Process
Shipment
with
Deliveries
Orders
Update
Demands
Deliveries
Planned Shipments
and
Planned Deliveries
Planned Deliveries
Update
Update
Manual
changes
Manual
changes
N
e
w

o
p
t
i
m
i
z
a
t
i
o
n

r
u
n
Update
Update

" Transportation planning-relevant changes made to any R/3 document that has a corresponding TP/VS
document are made to those documents.
" A shipment in the APO system changes its status if you change documents in the R/3 System that are
contained in a planned shipment in the APO System.
" Note: You can find a process list with the expected behavior of the APO System when changing the
planning objects in the OLTP system in note 362445.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
" Consolidation of transportation
demand in APO TP/VS
" Assignment of orders to vehicle
resources, manually or using the
optimizer
" Transfer orders into planned
shipments
Exchange
Transportation
Requirements
Collaborate on
Exceptions
Vehicle Scheduling
Routing/Scheduling
Create Orders
Vehicle Scheduling/
Vehicle Scheduling/
Create Planned
Shipments including
Planned
Deliveries
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Routing/Scheduling
Execute Shipment
Vehicle Scheduling (VS)

" The next step is the consolidation of transportation demand in APO. In the unassigned freight units
view in the vehicle scheduling planning board the transportation demand (sales orders, purchase
orders, and stock transfer orders) is visible. The orders in this area are not assigned to a resource and
have to be planned now.
" There are two ways to assign the transportation demand to the resources, manually and by using the
optimizer. To assign a transportation demand manually to a vehicle resource you have to select the
relevant resource first and then choose the unassigned orders which you want to plan on this resource.
" The optimizer takes all unassigned orders and unreleased shipments into consideration. The following
criteria is taken into account:
$ Departure from and return to depot
$ Loading and unloading time
$ Order consolidation
$ Cost minimization of shipment time
$ Cost minimization of distance
$ Costs for earliness/delay
$ Costs for non-delivery
$ Shipment fixed costs
" The resources are planned now and the orders are changed into planned shipments.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
" Assignment of shipments to carrier
%Manually or using a carrier
selection profile
Exchange
Transportation
Requirements
Collaborate on
Exceptions
Vehicle Scheduling
Routing/Scheduling
Create Orders
Vehicle Scheduling/
Vehicle Scheduling/
Create Planned
Deliveries
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Routing/Scheduling
Execute Shipment
Carrier Selection

" After the planning is settled, the planned shipments are assigned to certain carriers. The carrier
selection is executed manually for each carrier or automatically via a selection profile containing
several carriers.
" Carrier selection
$ Checks availability and compatibilities
$ Processes:
- Cost-based: Rules of freight cost engine will be taken from LES or you can maintain costs in the
APO system on the transportation lane
- Business share: Balancing of business share to fulfill contracts
- Priorities: Carrier with high priority will be chosen
$ User can choose the sequence of processes
" After the carrier selection is done the shipments are ready to be released or published. Publication
allows the planning result to be accepted as final and the shipment is prepared for transfer to the OLTP
system. Released shipments will not be deleted when doing a new optimization run.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
" The transfer is triggered from the
Interactive Vehicle Scheduling Board via
the GOTO-functions
" Transfer deliveries to R/3:
GOTO &OLTP generation of deliveries
" Prepare shipment transfer:
GOTO & Check release of planned
shipments
" Transfer shipments to R/3:
GOTO &Transfer planned shipments to
OLTP
Exchange
Transportation
Requirements
Collaborate on
Exceptions
Vehicle Scheduling
Routing/Scheduling
Create Orders
Vehicle Scheduling/
Create Planned
Deliveries
Carrier Selection/
Tendering
Routing/Scheduling
Execute Shipment
Transfer of Data to R/3

" After releasing the shipments, the OLTP transfer of deliveries and shipments is enabled. Now the
transfer of the planned shipments to the R/3 System can be triggered from the interactive vehicle
scheduling board.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe processes related to transportation
planning
! Identify the R/3 System documents that are
related to transportation planning
! Understand planning in the R/3 System vs.
planning in APO TP/VS
You are now able to:
Transportation Processes : Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: Transportation Processes Overview

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Describe the Transportation Management System functions.
List the documents that are used in the TMS components.
Outline the functions provided by the APO TP/VS planning
component.

A business transportation functions can be divided into two
fundamental steps: planning and execution. In an R/3 (OLTP) and
APO environment, the planning step is carried out in APO and
the execution step is performed in the R/3 (OLTP) System. It is
important to understand the functions provided in each system, in
order to perform these steps.
1-1 Select the process(es) that are not part of the Logistics Execution (LE) component of
R/3:
a) Transportation process
b) Internal warehouse process
c) Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
d) Goods issue process
e) Goods receipt process
f) Production Planning process
1-2 _______________________ shipments are an integral part of the process chain in
Procurement and are created from __________________ ________________
documents.
1-3 _______________________ shipments are created from _______________________
delivery documents that are generated from sales orders.
1-4 True or False. Delivery documents must be created before shipment documents can be
created.
1-5 True or False. Shipment costing is required for each shipment document.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-6 R/3 transportation and shipment cost processing includes:
a) _________________________________________________________
b) _________________________________________________________
c) _________________________________________________________
1-7 True or False. The goal of the transportation planning process is to optimize the
inbound and outbound transportation demand between the plant/DC and other locations
such as customers, suppliers and other plants/DCs.
1-8 Which of the following criteria does the TP/VS Optimizer take into account during
transportation planning:
a) Shipment fixed costs
b) Cost minimization of distance
c) Order consolidation
d) Loading and unloading time
e) Cost minimization of distance
f) Goods issue date
g) Costs for non-delivery
h) Distance in the delivery route code
1-9 During Carrier Selection, TP/VS can select carriers based on the following:
a) Vehicle capacities (weight, volume, number of pallets, and so on)
b) Availability and compatibility of products
c) Contract terms
d) Priority of carrier
e) Business share
f) Carrier quality / service performance rating
g) Costs
1-10 True or False. Sales order and Purchase order demand must be used for APO TP/VS
planning of outbound and inbound shipments, respectively.
1-11 What function triggers the transfer of planned deliveries and shipments?
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Unit: Transportation Processes Overview

1-1 Select the process(es) that are not part of the Logistics Execution (LE) component of
R/3:
Material Requirements Planning and the Production Planning process are not part of
the LE component.
1-2 Inbound shipments are an integral part of the process chain in Procurement and are
created from Inbound Delivery documents.
1-3 Outbound shipments are created from Outbound delivery documents that are
generated from sales orders.
1-4 True. Delivery documents must be created before shipment documents can be created.
1-5 False. Shipment costing is not required for each shipment document.
1-6 R/3 transportation and shipment cost processing includes:
a) Transportation processing
b) Shipment cost calculation
c) Shipment cost settlement
1-7 True. The goal of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound and
outbound transportation demand between the plant/DC and other locations such as
customers, suppliers, and other plants/DCs.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-8 Which of the following criteria does the TP/VS Optimizer take into account during
transportation planning:
a) Shipment fixed costs
b) Cost minimization of distance
c) Order consolidation
d)Loading and unloading time
e) Cost minimization of distance
g) Costs for non-delivery
1-9 During Carrier Selection, TP/VS can select carriers based on the following:
a) Vehicle capacities (weight, volume, number of pallets, and so on)
b) Availability and compatibility of products
d) Priority of carrier
e) Business share
g) Costs
1-10 False. Sales order and Purchase order demand does not have to be used for APO
TP/VS planning of outbound and inbound shipments, respectively.
1-11 The transfer of planned deliveries and shipments are triggered by the GOTO
function.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Organizational Units in Transportation
! Shipment document structure and control
! Shipment costing
! Basic R/3 to APO TP/VS interface settings
R/3 Transportation Overview
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Explain the organizational units related to R/3
System transportation
! Describe the structure of the shipment
document and its functions
! Identify and locate important information in the
shipment document
! Describe the processes related to R/3 System
freight costing
! Explain the purpose, structure and processes
related to the shipment cost document
! Make the basic customizing and master data
settings to interface an R/3 System with an
APO TP/VS System
R/3 Transportation Processing Overview: Unit
Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The computer manufacturer will utilize the APO
TP/VS component to plan shipments for goods to
be received from suppliers and to be shipped to its
customers.
! Although the planning function is done using
TP/VS, the execution of the shipments will be made
using the R/3 transportation application.
! The primary document used in these processes is
the shipment document. Project team members
have to understand its structure, functions, and the
information it contains.
! The manufacturer will also use the R/3 System
shipment costing function to compute the freight
costs related to the shipments.
R/3 Transportation Processing Overview: Business
Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Name the organizational units that are used in
R/3 System transportation processing and
execution
Organizational Units in Transportation : Topic
Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Organizational Units in Transportation
Storage
location
A
BB
C
B
Plant
Shipping point
1
2 3
4
5 67
89101112 1314
1516171819 2021
22232425262728
293031
Loading point
Warehouse
number
Company code
Transportation
planning point
Inventory
management /
stockkeeping
Shipping / transportation

" Transportation processing requires several organizational units. These units reflect the
organizational structure of the company.
" A company code is a self-contained unit with its own financial accounting. The company code is the
element for which a complete set of accounts is drawn up (a subsidiary within a group, for example).
" Plants are elements that subdivide a company code from a logistics standpoint. A plant produces
goods or provides goods for distribution (production plant and distribution center, for example).
Each plant is assigned to a single company code.
" In terms of Inventory Management, plants are subdivided into one or more storage locations (for
example, raw material storage area, finished products storage area, or open storage area).
" By assigning plant-storage location combination(s) to a warehouse number, you establish the link
between Inventory Management and Warehouse Management.
" The most important organizational element for shipping is the shipping point. It reflects the location
or the group of people that is responsible for carrying out shipping activities. Each delivery is
processed by a single shipping point. A shipping point is assigned to one or more plants. A shipping
point can be further subdivided into loading points.
" Transportation planning points process shipments. They are assigned to one company code and are
not linked to the other organizational units.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
The Transportation Planning Point
Transportation
planning points
1010
Hamburg
International
shipment by
sea
1011
Hamburg
Rail
shipments
1200
Dresden
Truck
Shipments
Planning and
processing
shipments
Company code

" The transportation planning point is the central point within the company that plans, processes,
and monitors shipments. It can be a location or a group of people responsible for processing.
" Each shipment is created and processed by a single transportation planning point.
" You can freely define the transportation planning points to meet your corporate requirements (for
example, in terms of the location or the mode of transport).
" The transportation planning point is defined for a specific company code in Customizing. This
assignment of the planning point to the company code is important for shipment cost calculation and
settlement.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Strabourg
Frankfurt
Nuremberg
Munich
Praha
Cologne
Trade center
Vienna
Border
Strasbourg
Frankfurt
Nuremberg
Munich
Prague
Route
Stage
Route
Stage
Cologne
Trade center
Vienna
Border
Route Definition

" A route is the journey to be covered between a departure point and a destination and is represented
by the route code.
" A route can be defined in great detail and consist of one or more individual stages, but it can also be
a general description or even simply a destination area.
" Like a shipment stage, a stage can be a leg, a load transfer point, or a border crossing point.
" For example, the above route consists of five stages: three legs, one load transfer point, and one
border crossing point.
" The route code is determined for each line item in a sales order and is copied into the header of the
outbound delivery document(s) created from the sales order.
" Inbound delivery documents do not require a route code, but one may be entered manually.
" The route code is not used by APO TP/VS because TP/VS determines the route stages based on the
planning criteria associated with transportation lanes. Routes in the R/3 System are only required to
identify the transportation documents as relevant for shipment.
" Multimode APO transports or APO transports with transshipment points are created with several
shipment stages in the R/3 System. In the R/3 System they are identified as generated manually.
" A transfer of the routes from the R/3 System to the APO System does not occur. Currently a report or
something similar is not available.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Factory
calendar
Shipping type
Transportation
planning
lead time
Travel duration
Transit time
Transportation
relevance
Distance
Description
Service agent
Route Route
Information in the Route

" You may define routes in Customizing or in LE master data maintenance.
" A route code can contain a number of fields of information that are important to the shipment (for
example, distance, transportation lead time, travel duration, shipping type, and service agent).
" When TP/VS is used for transportation planning, it will determine the route itinerary. Predefined
stages are not necessary for the route and should not be copied into the shipment document.
" You set transportation relevance for the route in Customizing for Transportation. The route must
be set for transportation relevance if it is used in sales orders and deliveries planned in TP/VS.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Define the structure of the shipment document
! Describe the role of the shipment type
! List the basic shipment types
! Identify key information fields in the shipment
document
! Explain the ways a shipment document can be
created
Shipment Document: Topic Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
The Shipment Document and its Functions
Record planned and
actual dates/status
information
Record shipment
characteristics
Determine shipment
stages
Grouping of inbound or
outbound deliveries in
shipments
Create output
(EDI / documents)
04.06.
12.06.
Shipment document
functions
Packing/loading
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
a
g
e
n
t
a
g
e
n
t
M
o
d
e

o
f
M
o
d
e

o
f
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
Plan Act.
C
B
A

" The shipment document is the central document that is used to model shipments in the R/3 System.
It contains all information necessary for organizing and carrying out a shipment.
" The shipment document provides the following functions:
$ Combining inbound deliveries to form inbound shipments
$ Combining outbound deliveries to form outbound shipments
$ Assigning service agents, modes of transport, shipment types, and so on
$ Planning and monitoring deadlines
$ Specifying shipment stages
$ Cross-delivery packing and creation of shipping units
$ Creating output and shipping papers
$ Recording shipment-relevant texts
$ Recording partner information
" Using TP/VS, shipments are created by combining deliveries within APO. Carriers and
transportation methods are also assigned to the shipments. They are then transferred to the R/3
System. In the R/3 System, they contain the data maintained in APO.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Structure of the Shipment Document
0000001234 Nordspeed 1000 18,586 0
0080004903 1200 8,386
0080004879 1000 3,200
0080004905 1000 7,000
TPPt: Wt/kg Service agent Shipments and deliveries ShPt
Shipment
header:
General data for the
entire shipment
Items:
Inbound or
outbound
deliveries in the
shipment

" The shipment document contains general data that applies to the whole document, such as shipment
type, transportation planning point, route, deadlines, and status information. This information is
displayed in the shipment header.
" Since the shipment is a collection of inbound or outbound deliveries that are shipped together, the
items of the shipment correspond exactly to the inbound deliveries in the case of inbound shipments,
and to the outbound deliveries in the case of outbound shipments.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipment type
Shipment type Shipment type
Leg indicator
Planning Profile
Split profile
Copying rule
Number assignment
Shipping type
Completion type
Texts
Output
Leg determination/stage
selection
Update change documents?
Shipment Type

" The shipment type controls elements in the shipment document and represents a particular
processing type for a shipment.
" Shipment type settings include:
$ The leg determination type (automatic leg determination, for example)
$ The completion type (loaded outbound shipment and inbound shipment, for example)
$ The processing control (collective shipment using one mode of transport, for example)
$ The service level (general cargo and grouped load, for example)
$ The shipping type (truck, train, and mail, for example)
$ The leg indicator (preliminary leg, subsequent leg, direct leg, for example)
$ Copying data from preceding documents (unique forwarding agent and route, for example)
$ Output determination and text determination procedure
$ Default values for the shipment document (weight and volume unit and planning profile, for
example)
" You can define your own shipment types to suit your own shipment requirements.
" Shipment types created for APO TP/VS use must not have leg determination enabled.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
DELIVERY 2
From : Hamburg
To: Frankfurt
Load : B
DELIVERY 1
From : Hamburg
To: Frankfurt
Load : A
SHIPMENT
A A B B
Individual Shipment
Hamburg
Frankfurt
Delivery 1,2

" An individual shipment has the following characteristics:
$ One or more inbound or outbound deliveries are involved in the shipment
$ There is one single point of departure and one single destination
$ In most cases, only one mode of transport is used
$ A shipment document is created
" In the standard system, shipment type 0001 is predefined. Important control parameters in
Customizing include:
$ Completion type: one = Loaded outbound shipment
$ Processing control: one = Individual shipment using one mode of transport
$ Leg indicator: four = Direct leg
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
DELIVERY 2
From : Hamburg
To: Frankfurt
Load : B
DELIVERY 1
From : Hamburg
To: Stuttgart
Load : A
SHIPMENT
Hamburg
Frankfurt
A A B B
Stuttgart
Delivery 1
A A
Collective Shipment
Delivery 1.2

" A collective shipment has the following characteristics:
$ One or more inbound or outbound deliveries are involved in the shipment
$ There are one or more points of departure and one or more destinations
$ In most cases, only one mode of transport is used
$ A shipment document is created
" In the standard system, shipment type 0002 is predefined. Important control parameters in
Customizing include:
$ Completion type: one = Loaded outbound shipment
$ Processing control: three = Collective shipment using one mode of transport
$ Leg indicator: four = Direct leg
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Delivery 3-6
Shipment 1
Rotterdam New York Harbor
Shipment 3
Delivery 1-6
Dresden Boston Philadelphia
Preliminary
legs
Main leg
Subsequent legs
Shipment 5
Delivery 3
Shipment 6
Delivery 4-6
Shipment 4
Transportation Chain
Hamburg
Delivery 1.2
Shipment 2
Delivery 1.2

" A transportation chain supports the shipment of inbound or outbound deliveries for which several
modes of transport are to be used. This means that the deliveries are involved in various subsequent
shipments.
" A transportation chain has the following characteristics:
$ One or more deliveries are involved in several shipments.
$ There are one or more points of departure and one or more destinations.
$ Various modes of transport can be used.
$ Several shipment documents are created: preliminary legs, main legs, and subsequent legs. Special
shipment types are available for this in the system.
" Example of a transportation chain:
$ The computer manufacturer ships deliveries from Dresden and Hamburg to Boston and
Philadelphia
$ The deliveries from Dresden and Hamburg are shipped separately by truck or rail to Rotterdam:
Leg indicator one = Preliminary leg
$ In Rotterdam, the deliveries are loaded together and shipped to New York: Leg indicator two =
Main leg
$ In New York, the deliveries are again shipped separately by truck to Boston and by rail to
Philadelphia: Leg indicator three = Subsequent leg
" APO TP/VS does not support the creation of transportation chains; however, various multi-modal
shipment scenarios can be modeled by TP/VS.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Delivery type
Delivery item
category
Out. delivery LF %
Cash sale BV
Out. delivery EL %
Standard item TAN %
Text item TATX
Out. delivery ELN %
Route of
the delivery
Route HH - F %
Route HH - M %
Northern route
Transportation Relevance
Out. delivery LF
Transportation
planning status = A
Route HH - F

" The transportation relevance of the delivery type, the delivery item category, and the route in
the delivery controls whether or not a shipment can be created.
" The delivery type must be set as relevant for transportation so that a shipment can be created.
" Similarly, at least one delivery item category in the delivery must be relevant for transportation.
" The outbound delivery must contain a route code that is relevant for transportation (does not apply
to inbound deliveries). A route is defined as the connection between a point of departure and a
destination point, with several possible points in between.
" If all three (or two in the case of inbound deliveries) conditions are met, the delivery has
transportation planning status A, which means that the delivery document is relevant for
transportation.
" You set transportation relevance in Customizing for Transportation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Options for Creating Shipments
Manually using
Create
Shipment
Automatically
in collective
processing
using the
worklist
Online B/ground
Using a
transportation
planning system
Creating shipments
R/3
TP/VS
Without
planning
proposal
With
planning
proposal

" The R/3 System contains different ways of creating shipments:
$ You can create shipments manually using the Create shipment function. You can select deliveries
due for shipping using different selection criteria and create the documents manually.
$ You can also use a planning proposal. This is a predefined profile whose rules specify that
deliveries are automatically combined into shipments and completed with data.
$ The system can also create shipments automatically. To do this, use a collective processing run
that is executed online or in batch mode. The system creates one or more shipment documents
according to different processing rules.
" If the shipments are created and optimized by an external transportation planning system such as
APO TP/VS, you can link to this system with an interface. In the R/3 to APO environment, this
interface is called the Core Interface (CIF).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Functions in Shipment Processing - Scenarios
Determining and
commissioning the
service agent
Determining the
means of transport
Scheduling
deadlines
Entering
texts / comments
Determining
the stages
Posting goods issue
Checking in the
means of transport
Printing documents/
generating output
Loading the means
of transport
Creating billing
documents based
on the deliveries

" Depending on the type of shipment, you may need to process the created shipment documents
further. Using shipment processing in the R/3 System, you can perform these activities and record
related information in the shipment document.
" Most of the activities are optional. Depending on your requirements, you may actually use onlysome
of them.
" Part of the information in shipment processing can be determined based on the shipment type (for
example, means of transport) or is adopted from the deliveries (for example, shipping units, service
agent, route, and route stages). You can usually change this information manually.
" Determine other data in the shipment document (for example, deadlines, notes, texts, and so on).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipment Stages
Leg
Rotterdam & New York
Partner: Forwarding agent
Border crossing point
Rotterdam
Partner: Customs agent
Stop
Customs
Load transfer point
New York
Partner: Load. supervisor

" Stages contain information on the geographical characteristics of a shipment. This information is
frequently used as a basis for calculating shipment costs.
" The system differentiates between the following stage types:
$ Leg: A connection between a starting point and an end point. The starting and end points can be a
transportation connection point, a shipping point, an unloading point at the customer's or vendor's
site, and so on.
$ Load transfer point: Location/point where a shipment is loaded/unloaded or transferred from one
means of transport to another.
$ Border crossing point: Location/point where a shipment crosses the border.
" For each stage, you can record information, such as the responsible service agent, deadlines,
distance, shipment cost relevance, freight code, and so on.
" You can also assign the deliveries to the individual stages.
" Using APO TP/VS planning, TP/VS will automatically assign the deliveries selected for a shipment
to the stages that are determined by TP/VS.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Deadlines in shipment
Deadlines in
shipment header
Other deadlines
(header level)
Planned/actual
deadlines:
Planned
Check-in
Loading start
Loading end
Shipment
completion
Shipment start
Shipment end
Operation
Planned
deadlines
Actual
deadline
Reason for
deviation
Locations and
so on
Deadlines per
stage
Planned/actual
deadlines:
Stage start
Stage end
Deadlines in the Shipment Document
12
9
6
3
11 1
7 5
8 4
2 10
MO TU WETH FR SA SU
1
8
15
21
28
2
9
16
22
29
3
10
17
23
30
4
11
18
24
31
5
12
19
25
6
13
20
26
7
14
21
27

" You can record the times and deadlines for planning and executing the transportation activities in
the shipment document.
" For standard activities, such as planning, check-in, loading, processing, shipment start and shipment
end, you can record planned and actual deadlines in the shipment document at header level. You
can also specify exact times for the deadlines.
" You can also define planned and actual start and end dates for each shipment stage.
" Similar to Shipping, you can specify additional individual deadlines that are used for further
controlling shipment processes. Besides planned and actual deadlines and times, you can also enter
operation types, reasons for deviations and locations (points).
" You can define a deadline procedure (network profile) for your individual deadlines for each
shipment document type.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Processing
status of
shipment
Status information in the shipment
document header:
Overall status
Planned
Check-in
Loading start
Loading end
Shipment completion
Shipment start
Shipment end
%
%
%
%
Check-in
Completed
Completed
Not completed
Not completed
Not completed
Not completed
Not completed
Status Information in the Shipment Document

" When transportation activities such as planning, checking in, loading, and so on, are finished, you
can set a status. As soon as the status is set, the activity is considered completed. You always know
the current processing status of a shipment and can quickly provide information.
" You can set the status by:
$ Choosing the corresponding pushbutton; the current date is adopted as the actual date.
$ Entering the actual date; the status is then set by the system.
" A traffic light symbol displays the overall status of the shipment.
$ Red: Planned status is set.
$ Yellow: Check-in/Loading Start/Loading End status is set
$ Green: Shipment completion/Shipment Start/Shipment End status is set
" Note: For shipment cost calculation, the status Planned must be set as a minimum.
" Note: The planned status is automatically set if you transfer shipments from TP/VS to R/3.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the shipment costing process
! List the requirements of shipment cost
calculation
! Explain the structure of the shipment cost
document
! Understand the shipment costing settlement
process
Shipment Costing: Topic Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipment Cost Processing in Detail
Shipment
Shipment cost document
1. Calculate shipment costs 2,316.- USD
2. Assign shipment costs to account
3. Transfer shipment costs
4. Settle shipment costs
A B
XX XX

" Shipment cost calculation and shipment cost settlement are available for both outbound and
inbound shipments.
" The shipment costs are recorded in a new system document called the shipment cost document.
You perform the following functions from within this document:
$ Calculate the shipment costs
$ Account assignment: Assign the costs in Financial Accounting and Controlling
$ Transfer the costs to FI and CO
$ Settle the costs with the service agent
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Requirements for Shipment Cost Calculation
The shipment document must
have the necessary overall
status, (planned status at the
very least)
The shipment document must
be shipment cost relevant
ShpmntCostsRel. %
Status
Planned %
% Completed
Shipment

" A shipment must be relevant for shipment costs (at header and/or stage level) in order to create a
shipment cost document for a shipment. The shipment must also have the required overall status set
in the definition of the shipment cost type. As a minimum, it must have Planned status.
" Execute the following in Customizing:
$ Define number ranges for the shipment costs.
$ Define and assign shipment cost types and item categories.
$ For each shipment type, you must set shipment cost relevance for the following shipment
elements: header, leg, border crossing point, and load transfer point.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Creating a Shipment Cost Document
1 : 1
Shipment cost
document
1
2
3
Shipment
document
1
2
3

" You can create shipment cost documents individually in dialog mode or using collective
processing.
" If you create an individual shipment cost document, always directly refer to a shipment document.
Create exactly one shipment cost document for each shipment document. As a result, there is a 1:1
relationship between the two documents.
" Depending on your settings, the system automatically calculates the shipment costs, assigns them
to an account, and transfers them to Financial Accounting when you create the shipment cost
document.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Structure of the Shipment Cost Document
Shipment cost document
Header
Item 1
Sub-item 1
Item 2
Sub-item 1
Sub-item 2
Overall status
Reference data
Administrative data
Item status
Pricing procedure
Determined pricing date
Tax data
Settlement data
Service procurement
Result of shipment
cost calculation

" The shipment cost document consists of the following sections:
$ Shipment cost header
The shipment cost header contains general information on the entire document. Status, reference,
and administrative information is provided. The status is a cumulated status derived from the
individual items.
$ Shipment cost item
The items contain general data for shipment cost calculation and settlement, such as service agent,
pricing and settlement date, tax amount and tax base amount, and organizational data such as
company code, plant, and purchasing organization. Each item has its own status for the shipment
cost calculation, account assignment, and transfer functions.
$ Shipment cost sub-item
Shipment costs are calculated at shipment cost sub-item level. The calculation result is also
recorded at this level.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Items of the Shipment Cost Document
Shipment Shipment costs
Header
Insurance
ABC Insurance
Stage 1
Hamburg - Frankfurt
Nordspeed forwarding
agent
Stage 2
Frankfurt - Stuttgart
Schmalenbach
forwarding agent
1. Item
2. Item
3. Item

" The shipment cost items either refer to the shipment header or to a shipment stage.
" For example, an item that refers to the header can include insurance charges for shipment insurance.
An item that refers to a shipment stage can include load transfer costs.
" The function of the items is controlled through the item category.
" The items can be automatically generated or manually created depending on the Customizing
settings.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Overview of Shipment Cost Calculation
Pricing procedure
1. Basic freight FB00
2. Discount 1 FD00
3. Discount 2 FD10
Condition type FB00
Access sequence: MATK
Records for cond. type FB00
No valid record available
Valid record available
1300 USD 1 t or more
Scale
Access sequence:MATK
Condition tables:
1. Service agent/tariff zone/
freight class
2. Service agent/tariff zone
Shipment costs
Conditions
From NY to WA 10 t
FB00 1100 USD
FD00 -100 USD
FD10
Basic freight
Discount 1
Discount 2 -5 %

" In this example, 10 tons of a material are shipped by a forwarding agent from New York to
Washington. The system determines the shipment costs automatically.
" The system first determines the corresponding pricing procedure. This contains every possible
condition type within shipment pricing in a particular sequence.
" The system reads the first condition type in the pricing procedure. The condition type identifies the
characteristics of a condition.
" For this condition type, the system determines the assigned access sequence.
" The system reads the access sequence. In the sequence, the condition tables are accessed at least
once. The sequence of the condition tables constitutes the search strategy to determine the
corresponding condition record.
" The system searches for valid condition records for the condition tables (accesses). A condition
record contains the actual shipment rates. If no valid condition record exists for the first condition
table, the system searches for condition records for the second table.
" When the system finds a valid condition record for a condition table, the condition record is read and
the corresponding value is copied into the shipment cost document.
" The system repeats all of these steps for each condition type until the entire pricing procedure is
processed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Condition Records for Shipment Costs
Validity period Validity period
07/01/1999 07/01/1999 - - 12/31/2002 12/31/2002
1000 lb 10 USD per 100 lb
Condition type: FB00 Basic freight
Service agent: 1120
Tariff zone - departure: DE20
Tariff zone - destination: DE80
Freight class: B
Level at which
the condition
is defined
to
Scale:

" Pricing determines prices and surcharges/discounts (= conditions) for a business transaction and
allows the user to specifically influence these conditions manually.
" Prices, surcharges, and discounts are stored in condition records.
" You can define conditions at any level. A level corresponds to the fields in the condition table in
which a condition record is stored. The level also represents the key fields for access to a condition.
" Common levels at which price agreements are made are predefined in the standard system.
" You can add any levels that you need. You can make conditions dependent on any fields of a
business document.
" By specifying a validity period, you can restrict a condition to a specific period.
" You can maintain the values within a condition record (price, surcharge, and discount) depending on
a scale (weight-based, volume-based, or value-based scale). You can also use multi-dimensional
scales. There is no limit to the number of scale levels.
" For each condition record, you can define a lower and an upper limit that allows you to manually
change a pricing element within the limits specified.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Requirements Requirements Financial Financial Accounting Accounting
Accruals in FI
Assignment in CO
Entry/acceptance of
services performed
Invoice /
credit
memo
Accruals become payables
A B
XX XX
B 1058
XX XX
Cost center 2556
Transfer
Settlement with
service agent
Shipment Cost Settlement with Direct Transfer
Shipment costs
Item 1 576

" Shipment costs are settled with the service agent by shipment cost item.
" Settlement includes:
$ Assigning and transferring shipment costs to Financial Accounting, the formation of accruals,
and the assignment of costs to a CO object.
$ Settlement of costs with the service agent: Posting payables by cancelling the accruals.
" You need to enter and accept the services provided before you can transfer costs to Financial
Accounting. The system automatically creates the service entry sheet based on a purchase order for
external services.
" Before you can settle costs with the service agent, you need to create an invoice using manual
invoice verification or create a credit memo using the credit memo procedure.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
1. Account assignment
G/L account determination
Assignment for Controlling
2. Transfer to Financial Accounting
Purchase order determination
Creation of the service entry sheet
Establishment of accruals
3. Invoice creation
Credit memo procedure (ERS procedure)
Manual Invoice Verification
Steps During Settlement

" During account assignment the system determines the correct G/L account in Financial Accounting
for each shipment cost item and the assignment for Controlling. Account assignment can be carried
out at different levels, depending on how detailed you want to track costs.
" Transfer to Financial Accounting to establish accruals requires the entry of services performed.
However, each service entry sheet is based on a purchase order. You must initially create this
purchase order for the service agent in Purchasing. During the posting process, services performed
are accepted; to establish accruals, the system generates an accounting document in Financial
Accounting. The system creates additional subsequent documents in Financial Accounting.
" Using the credit memo procedure, also referred to as the ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement)
procedure, you can settle the shipment costs with the service agents without receiving invoices from
them. You can choose from different settlement periods. Transfer the calculated shipment costs to
Financial Accounting. The invoices are verified by the service agent. If the service agent discovers
variances, you can post these as subsequent debits/credits. If you receive invoices from the service
agent, you can also verify the invoices manually and create the invoices manually.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Make the necessary customizing settings in
the R/3 System to interface the R/3 System
transportation application with the APO TP/VS
component.
! Create the necessary material master data in
the R/3 System for the APO TP/VS integration
Settings Necessary for Integration: Topic
Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3 Customizing and Master Data Activities
! Transportation relevance of orders and deliveries
! Definition of Shipment Document Number Ranges
! Definition of Shipment Types
! Transportation Planning Point Determination
! Check ATP-Category
! Create Packaging Materials needed in TP/VS
! Check Strategy Group
Customizing Activities
Material Master Requirements

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Relevance
R/3: Transportation relevance of deliveries
Route
Delivery
Type
Item
Category

R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution & Transportation & Shipments
& Maintain Transportation Relevance
" Only transport-relevant deliveries can be assigned to shipments. Outbound deliveries route
determination has to be maintained, because outbound deliveries without an assigned route are not
transportation relevant. For inbound deliveries, relevance is determined from the Item Category and
Delivery Document Type.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipment Document Number Ranges
R/3 and APO: Definition of Number Ranges
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution &Transportation &Shipments &
Define Number Ranges for Shipments
APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) &Transportation
Planning/ Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) & Basic Settings
& Define Number Range for Temporary Shipments
APO IMG: ... & Define Number Range for Shipments
R/3
APO
External number range in the R/3 System has to correspond with
internal number range in APO.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Shipment Type Required Settings
R/3: Definition of Shipment Types
Example for outbound shipments:

IMG: Logistics Execution & Transportation &Shipments &Define Shipment Types

" Note: Maintain Do not adopt stages and No legs to be determined!
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Planning Point
R/3: Transportation Planning Point Determination:
IMG: Enterprise Structure & Definition & Logistics Execution &
Maintain Transportation Planning Point
IMG: Logistics Execution &Transportation & Interfaces &
Transportation Planning Point Determination

" Update the Transportation Planning Point determination table so that TP/VS can determine the
Transportation Planning point to be assigned to the shipment documents created in TP/VS planning.
" A default transportation planning point should also be maintained.
" The Shipping Point and Shipping Type can be used in the table to determine the Transportation
Planning Point.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Packaging Materials Needed for APO Mapping
R/3: Packaging Materials needed for APO Mapping Table for Vehicles:
'SAP-Menu: Logistics &Materials Management &Material Master &
Material &Create (special) &Packaging (Transaction: MM01)
APO

" Create materials of material type VERP (naming should be the same as that used in the APO
Transport Methods).

Note: In material master view Sales: General/Plant Data a packaging material type means of
transport (For example, Trucks) has to be maintained. See Packaging Material Types in R/3 IMG:

Logistics General&Handling Unit Management&Basics&Define Packaging Material Types
APO: Mapping Table for Vehicles
" IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO)& Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling(TP/VS)& Interfaces &Maintain Mapping Table for Vehicles
Note: The APO Mapping Table for Vehicles is key sensitive. Maintain the column for external
vehicle description only by using uppercase.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Material Master Data Field Checks

SAP-Menu: Logistics & Materials Management & Material Master & Material &Change&
Immediately

" ATP-Category in Material Master
" View: MRP 3: See Availability Check field
" Checking Group for Availability Check: 02 (Individual rqmt)
" This field must be set for individual requirements for sales requirement data to be transferred
to APO.
" Strategy Group
There are four R/3 strategy groups that are not supported in APO:
11 Gross requirements
59 Phantom Assembly
52 Future Use
62 Future Use
In addition, some strategy groups are configured so that requirements are not transferred to APO. If
requirements are not transferred to APO, transportation planning will not occur for the material.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3 Transportation Processing Overview: Unit
Summary
! Explain the organizational units related to R/3
System transportation
! Describe the structure of the shipment document
and its functions
! Identify and locate important information in the
shipment document
! Describe the processes related to R/3 System
freight costing
! Explain the purpose, structure and processes
related to the shipment cost document
! Make the necessary setting to interface an R/3
System with an APO TP/VS system

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: R/3 Transportation Processing Overview
Topic: Transportation Planning Point

Understand the organizational units relevant for transportation
processing in Customizing.
Create a Transportation Planning Point to be used for
shipment documents created by APO TP/VS planning.

As an employee in transportation planning and processing, you
are also a member of the APO implementation team in the
transportation area.
Familiarize yourself with R/3 transportation processing in general
before you begin setting up the system and trying out its shipment
processes.
You examine the structure of the shipment documents and
identify what information they contain. Create two new shipment
types to facilitate the creation of R/3 shipment documents from
planned shipments in TP/VS.
You also need to familiarize yourself with the organizational
structures, to learn how they are defined and assigned. Create a
new Transportation Planning Point to be used when creating R/3
shipment documents from the APO TP/VS component.
1-1 True or false?
1-1-1 A company code is an independent accounting unit.
1-1-2 Each plant has exactly one shipping point.
1-1-3 Shipments are processed at a transportation planning point.
1-1-4 Each transportation planning point must be assigned to a plant.
1-1-5 Each transportation planning point must be assigned to a warehouse
number.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-2 Which transportation planning points are defined for company code 1000?
____________________________________________________________
Go to the address screen for transportation planning point 1000.
On which street is it located?
______________________________________________________
1-3 Create a new Transportation Planning Point to be used for shipments created from
the APO TP/VS component. Identify the Transportation Planning Point as AP##.
Assign it to Company Code 1000.
Description: TP/VS Group ##
In the Edit Address fields:
Name: APO TP/VS GR ##
Search Term: AP##
Country: DE
Language: English
1-4 When shipment documents are created from the APO TP/VS system, the
Transportation Planning Point must be determined for each shipment document. In
this step you will update the interface table that is used to determine the
Transportation Planning Point. Shipments will be planned for Shipping Point X0##
Dresden. Create the following entries in the Determination of Transportation
Planning Point table.
Shipping Point Shipping Type TrspPlanPt
X0## Blank AP##
X0## 01 AP##
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Shipment Document Type

Create shipment document types used for APO planning.

Shipment document types must exist for shipment documents
created in APO TP/VS planning. You will create a shipment
document type for inbound shipments created in TP/VS and a
shipment document type for outbound shipment documents
created in TP/VS planning. In addition, you will update the
Transportation Planning point interface table for the R/3 System
to APO TP/VS environment.

2-1 An outbound shipment for your group has been created in the system as an example.
Display the outbound shipment.
Search for the document using the F4 Help. Use the External ID 1 field as a search
term.
External ID 1: GR##-1. (Note: This search is case-sensitive; enter the External
Identification EXACTLY as shown.)
2-1-1 Which outbound deliveries does this shipment contain?
_____________________________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

2-1-2 Find the following information in the shipment document:
Shipment type:
_____________________________________________
Ship-to address:
_____________________________________________
Shipping point:
_____________________________________________
Shipment weight:
_____________________________________________
2-1-3 Display the corresponding document flow.
What order initiated this document flow? What is its status?
______________________________________________________
2-1-4 Check whether the shipment costs have already been calculated for this
shipment. To do this, check the overall status of shipment cost calculation in
the shipment header.
Overall status of shipment cost calculation:
________________________________
Number of the shipment cost document:
________________________________
2-2 To facilitate creation of inbound shipment documents in the R/3 System
corresponding to planned inbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new shipment
type, AI##, using existing Shipment Type 0010 as a template. In the new shipment
type you need to make the following settings:

Field Name Data
Shipment Type Description APO Inbound GR##
No. Range Ext. 02
Adopt Route 2-Do Not Adopt stages
Determine Legs blank (No legs to be determined)
Weight Unit KG (Kilograms)
Volume Unit M3 (Cubic Meters)
Copy Routine 11 (Route/Deadlines)
Do not change any other settings.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

2-3 To enable creation of outbound shipment documents in the R/3 System
corresponding to planned outbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new
shipment type, AO##, using existing Shipment Type 0002 as a template. In the new
shipment type you need to make the following settings:

Field Name Data
Shipment Type Description APO Outbound GR##
No. Range Ext. 02
Adopt Route 2-Do Not Adopt stages
Determine Legs blank (No legs to be determined)
Weight Unit KG (Kilograms)
Volume Unit M3 (Cubic Meters)
Copy Routine 11 (Route/Deadlines)
Do not change any other settings.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Basics of Shipment Cost Processing

Understand how the shipment cost document is organized and
where it is found
Check whether shipment documents are relevant for shipment
costs
Display shipment cost documents individually online
Search for information in the shipment cost document

In order to create a shipment cost document, the shipment
document must be relevant for shipment costs.

3-1 First, answer the following questions about shipment cost processing:
3-1-1 What steps are involved in shipment cost processing?
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
3-1-2 Describe the structure of the shipment cost document:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
3-1-3 True or false?
You can combine several shipment documents to form one shipment cost
document.
The shipment must have at least Shipment completed status before a
shipment cost document can be created.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Shipment Costing and TP/VS-Related
Customizing

Make the customizing settings necessary to assign your APO
shipment types to a shipment cost type.
Make the relevant customizing settings necessary to perform
shipment costing for shipments planned in APO TP/VS and
provide the ability to perform carrier selection in TP/VS using
freight rates established in the R/3 System.
Set up Pricing Procedure determination in Shipment Costing.

The ability to perform shipment costing for both inbound and
outbound shipments and to provide the ability to influence carrier
selection based on actual freight rates are significant benefits of
using the R/3 Transportation application combined with the APO
TP/VS component. As a member of the TP/VS project team you
will need to make the required customizing settings in the R/3
System to facilitate these functions.
4-1 Assign your two new Shipment Types AI## and AO## to Shipment Cost Type 0001
in R/3 Customizing.
4-1-1 Set the Shipment Header, Leg, Load Transfer Point and Border Crossing
Cost Types as Relevant for shipment costs for each assignment.
4-2 Because you will be using tariff zone codes in your freight rates for shipment
costing, you must update the tariff zone determination table to include your new
Transportation Planning Point for each of your carriers. You have three carriers that
have rates established for shipment costing and carrier determination in TP/VS:
1058, 1925 and 1930. These carriers are also used for shipments created for
Transportation Planning Point 1000, so you can copy as the existing entries to your
Transportation Planning Point AP##. You should also copy all subitems in the
entry.
4-3 Update the shipment costing pricing procedure determination table to reflect your
new Transportation Planning Point. Use Transportation Planning Point 1000 as a
reference for the copy as process.
4-4 Make the required setting in the Purchasing Data determination table for your new
Transportation Planning Point, AP##. Use the same purchasing organizational data
as TransportationPlanning Point 1000.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

4-5 To satisfy a requirement for TP/VS Carrier Selection when external costs are used
as a criteria for selection, make an entry in the LES Shipping Point Determination
table for your plants and their corresponding shipping points. The table entries are
as follows:

Shipping
Condition
Loading
Group
Plant Shipping Point
10## Z0##
12## X0##
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Stock Transport-Related Customizing

Make the required, basic customizing settings required for
stock transport processing.

When a new plants are established in the R/3 System, there are
some fundamental settings required to facilitate the processing of
stock transports both inter and intra-company. These settings are
independent of TP/VS. You must make these settings before
stock transport orders are created in the R/3 System.
5-1 To complete the required customizing settings, perform the following steps:
5-1-1 Copy the customer master record (1187) representing Plant 1000, to a new
customer master record, T-S090##. You must copy all views (General,
Company, and Sales Area) to your new customer master.
5-1-2 Copy the customer master record (22000) representing Plant 2200, to a new
customer master record, T-S200##. You must copy all views (General,
Company, and Sales Area) to your new customer master.
5-1-3 Update the Plant table in Stock Transport customizing with your new
customer master for Plant 10##. Also, update the Plant table for Plant 22##
with the customer account number you just created for the plant T-S200##.
5-1-4 Check and make any required assignments in the Assign delivery
type/checking table in Stock Transport customizing. The following
assignments must exist:
Type: NB SPlt: 12## DlvTy: NLCC C: B
UB 10## NL RP
5-1-5 Check and make any required assignments in the Purchasing document type
table in the Stock Transport customizing area. The table must include the
following combinations of allowed stock transports and corresponding
Purchase Order Document Types:
10## to 12## UB No one-step processing
12## to 22## NB No one-step processing
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

5-1-6 Verify and make any necessary changes to the Transportation Relevancy
tables. In this step you will make sure that delivery document types NL and
NLCC are set as relevant for transportation processing. In addition, you
must verify that all relevant item categories for these document types are set
as relevant for transportation processing. Unless these objects are set set as
relevant for transportation processing you will not get shipment documents
created when TP/VS planned shipments are published.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Settings Necessary for Integration

Create the Packaging Materials needed for APO TP/VS
planning and integration with the R/3 System.

When APO TP/VS creates shipment documents and they are
subsequently transferred to the R/3 System for execution, the
Transportation Methods codes from TP/VS are translated into
corresponding R/3 System packaging materials in the shipment
document. These packaging materials must exist in the R/3
System Material Master.
6-1 Create two Material Master records, FTL-## and LTL-## by creating with
reference from TRUCK-04 and TRUCK-05, respectively. These materials should
have Material Type of VERP and Industry Sector of Mechanical Engineering. The
following views should be created: Basic Data1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1, Sales:
Sales Org. Data 2, Sales: General/Plant Data and Accounting 1. In the
Organizational Data enter only your Plant 12## but copy from Plant 1200 of the
reference material.
Description for FTL-##: FTL Group ##
Description for LTL-##: LTL Group ##
All other data fields should remain the same as the reference material.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Transportation Planning Point
1-1 True or false?
1-1-1 True
1-1-2 False A plant can have more than one shipping point.
1-1-3 True
1-1-4 False A transportation planning point is only defined for a particular
company code and is not linked to other organizational units.
1-1-5 False A transportation planning point is only defined for a particular
company code and is not linked to other organizational units.
1-2 Transportation planning points for company code 1000:
R/3 IMG: Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics Execution Maintain
Company code 1000: Transportation planning points:
0007, 1000, 1010, 1011, 1200
Select the entry 1000: Goto Address
Street/House number: Altersdorferstr. 13
1-3 To create the Transportation Planning Point:
Select New Entries
Enter the new Transportation Planning Point, the description, and the Company
Code.
Enter.
Enter the Address data.
Enter.
Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-4 Update the interface table used to determine the Transportation Planning Point in
the APO system.
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Interfaces Transportation Planning
Point Determination
Select New entries.
Make the entries as shown in the Exercise.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Shipment Document Type

2-1 Display the Inbound shipment document:
Logistics Logistics Execution Transportation Transportation Planning Display
Select the F4 key.
Enter the search data in the External ID 1 field.
Choose Execute.
Choose your shipment from the shipment list.
2-1-1 Outbound deliveries:
Shipments and deliveries overview screen:
One outbound delivery is involved in this shipment.
Number: Document numbers will vary
2-1-2 Information in the shipment document:
Shipment type: Shipment overview: Shipment type field:
_________________________________
Ship-to address: Shipments and deliveries overview screen:
Recipient address field: _________________________________
Shipping point: Shipments and deliveries overview screen:
Shipping point field: __________________________________
Shipment weight: Shipments and deliveries overview screen
Total weight field: __________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

2-1-3 Document flow:
Environment Document flow
Order number: Document numbers will vary
The status of the order is completed.
2-1-4 Shipment costs:
Goto Shipment overview: Shipment cst cal tab
Overall status of shipment cost calculation: Completely processed
Number of the shipment cost document: Choose Shipment cost document.
Document numbers will vary
2-2 To create the inbound TP/VS Shipment Type:
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Shipments Define Shipment Types
Select Shipment Type 0010.
Choose Copy As.
Enter Shipment Type AI## and the remainder of the settings from the exercise.
Choose Enter.
Choose Save.
2-3 To create the outbound TP/VS Shipment Type:
Select Shipment Type 0002.
Choose Copy As.
Enter Shipment Type AO## and the remainder of the settings from the exercise.
Choose Enter.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Basics of Shipment Cost processing
3-1 Questions about shipment cost processing:
3-1-1 Steps in shipment cost processing:
Shipment cost processing begins with the creation of the shipment cost
document. Within the document:
- You calculate the shipment costs
- Find the G/L accounts in FI and the CO objects (account assignment)
- Transfer the shipment costs to FI and CO
- Settle the shipment costs with the forwarding agents (invoice verification)
You can automate most of these steps.
3-1-2 Structure of the shipment cost document:
The shipment cost document consists of three levels:
Header: Contains data that is relevant for the entire document, such as
status and administrative data
Items: This level establishes what costs were incurred for what purpose and
with whom they should be settled
Subitems: The actual calculation takes place at this level.The costs are
calculated according to condition records defined in the system.
3-1-3 True or false?
False. Only one shipment cost document is created per shipment document.
(2) False. The required status can be set for each shipment cost type, but
planned status at least is required.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Shipment Costing and TP/VS-Related
Customizing
4-1 Assign your Shipment Types AI## and AO## to ShipmentCost Type 0001:
R/3 IMG: Logistics ExecutionTransportationShipment CostsShipment Cost
Document Shipment Cost Relevance and Default for Shipment Cost Type
Enter Shipment cost type 0001 for your Shipment types.
Choose Save.
4-1-1 Under Dialog Structure, select: Define shipment cost relevance for
shipment type
For your shipment types, select the Header, Leg, Load Transfer Point, and
Border Crossing boxes.
Choose Save.
4-2 Make the updates to the Tariff zone assignment table:
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Basic Shipping
Functions Define and assign tariff zones
Under the Dialog Structure select the line: Define organizational key for tariff
zone assigs
Select the records in TPPt 1000 for Service Agents: 1058, 1925 and 1930.
Select the Copy as button.
Type your Transportation Planning Point, AP##, over the TPPt 1000 and select
Enter.
Select Copy all for the dialog boxes, and continue for the information boxes.
After the three entries are copied, select Save.
Exit back to the menu.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

4-3 Update the shipment cost pricing procedure determination table:
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Pricing Pricing
Control Define And Assign Pricing Procedures Define pricing procedure
determination for shipment costs
You will create the pricing procedure determination data for your Transportation
Planning Point by copying the records from Transportation Planning Point 1000 to
the clipboard, then paste-ing the records in your Transportation Planning Point,
Select Transportation Planning Point 1000.
Select the Determine pricing procedure path under the Dialog Structure.
After the table is displayed, press Cntl + Y (Mark). The cursor should turn into the
cross-hair symbol. Place the cross-hair in the upper left-hand corner of the first
record, drag the cursor across the first record and then at the end of the first record,
at the vertical scroll bar, drag the cursor down the screen to the line below the last
determination record (the line with It.Det.Grp of 0006). Release the left mouse
button and press Cntl + C to copy the block to the clipboard.
Select Transportation Planning Point under the Dialog Structure to return to the list
of Transportation Planning Points.
Select your Transporation Planning Point from this table.
Select the Determine pricing procedure path under the Dialog Structure.
Place the cursor in the It.Det.Grp. field on the first line of the table.
Press Cntl + V to copy the clipboard to the records in your Transportation Planning
Point.
Select Save.
4-4 Make the required entry in the Purchasing Data determination table for your
Transportation Planning Point:
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Settlement
Assign Purchasing Data
Use the same purchasing organizational data as that for Transportation Planning
Point 1000 and Shipment Cost Type 0001 by using the Copy As function.
Select the line with TPPt 1000 and SCTy 0001 and choose the Copy As button.
Enter your TPPt. AP##.
Select Enter.
Select Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

4-5 Update the Shipping Point determination Table with your Plants and Shipping
Points.
R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point
and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Points
Select the New Entries button.
Make the entries in the table from the data in your exercise.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Stock Transport-related customizing
5-1 Perform the following steps to customize the Stock Transport environment:
5-1-1 Create a new customer master to represent your plant 12## in outbound
delivery documents of transfers of materials to the plant.
R/3 Standard Menu: Logistics Logistics Execution Master Data
Partner Customer Create Total
Customer Account Group: 0001 Sold-to
Customer: T-S090##
Company Code: 1000
Sales Area: 1000/12/00
Reference: Customer: 1187
Company: 1000
General data:
Name: Plant 12##
Search term: Plant 12##
Postal Code: 01069
City: Dresden
Transportation Zone: D000000000
Language: English
Control data tab:
Trading partner: 1000
VAT Registration: DE123456789
Choose Enter.
Select Company code data button.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Company data:
No data entry required.
Choose Enter.
Select Sales area data button.
Sales area data:
Select the Shipping tab.
Shipping Conditions: (50 + ##) Enter the sum of 50 plus your group
##
Select the Billing document tab.
Tax Classification: 0 non-taxable
Choose Save.
5-1-2 Create a new customer master to represent your plant 22## in outbound
delivery documents of transfers of materials to the plant.
R/3 Standard Menu: Logistics Logistics Execution Master Data
Partner Customer Create Total
Customer Account Group: 0001 Sold-to
Customer: T-S200##
Company Code: 1000
Reference: Customer: 22000
Company: 1000
General data:
Name: Plant 22##
Search term: Plant 22##
Postal Code: 75015
City: Paris
Region: 75
Transportation Zone: F000010000
Language: English
Control data tab:
Trading partner: 2200
VAT Registration: FR93341612695
Choose Enter.
Select Company code data button.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Company data:
No data entry required.
Choose Enter.
Select Sales area data button.
Sales area data:
Select the Shipping tab.
Shipping Conditions: (50 + ##) Enter the sum of 50 plus your group
##
Select the Billing document tab.
Tax Classification: 0 non-taxable
Choose Save.
5-1-3 Update the Plant table in Stock Transport customizing:
R/3 IMG: Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order
Set Up Stock Transport Order
Select the Plant button.
Select Plant 12##.
Select the Details icon.
Enter your customer: T-S090## in the Customer no. plant field.
Choose Save.
Select Plant 22##.
Select the Details icon.
Enter your customer: T-S200## in the Customer no. plant field.
Choose Save.
Exit back to the Stock Transport Order customizing list.
5-1-4 Check and update the Assign delivery type/checking table.
Select the Assign delivery type/checking button.
Check and update the table for document types: NB and UB for your plants
12## and 10## per the Exercise.
Choose Save.
Exit back to the Stock Transport Order customizing list.
5-1-5 Check and update the Purchasing document type table.
Select the Purchasing document type button.
Ensure that there are two entries in the table that match the Exercise data.
Enter and Save, if necessary.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

5-1-6 Check Transportation Relevancy for the Stock Transport document types
and related Item Categories.
R/3 Customizing: Logistics Execution Transportation Shipments
Maintain transportation relevance
Select Maintain transportation relevance for delivery types.
Verify that delivery types: NL and NLCC are "checked" for transportation
relevance.
Exit back to the Activity box.
Select Maintain transportation relevance for delivery item types,
Verify that Item Categories: ELN, NLC and NLN are "checked" for
transportation relevance.
Exit back to the IMG.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Settings Necessary for Integration
6-1 To create the Material Master records:
SAP Menu: Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create
(Special) Packaging
Enter Material Number : FTL-##
Enter Industry Sector: Mechanical Engineering
Enter Copy From Material: TRUCK-04
Select Select Views.
Select the views.
Choose Continue.
Enter your plant 12## in the Plant data field and enter 1200 in the Copy From
Plant data field.
Choose Continue.
On the Basic data 1 screen, enter the description as indicated in the Exercise.
Choose Enter on all remaining screens.
Choose Save on the Accounting 1 screen.
Enter Material Number : LTL-##
Enter Industry Sector: Mechanical Engineering
Enter Copy From Material: TRUCK-05
Select Select Views.
Select the views.
Choose Continue.
Enter your plant 12## in the Plant data field and enter 1200 in the Copy From
Plant data field.
Choose Continue.
On the Basic data 1 screen, enter the appropriate description.
Choose Enter on all remaining screens.
Choose Save on the Accounting 1 screen.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Contents:
APO Overview
! Introduction to supply chain planning
! Overview of APO Planning Components

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Explain the advantages of APO
! List the components of APO
! Understand the integration between the APO
components
APO Overview: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The electronics manufacturer is implementing a
number of APO components. It is important to
understand the relationship between the
components and the role that each will play in the
corporate planning process.
APO Overview: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Increase customer responsiveness at least cost
Manufacturer
Distribution
Supplier
Information flow
Retail Outlet Consumer
Supply Chain Optimization
CASH FLOW
Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
The Supply Chain: From Supplier to Consumer

" Supply Chain Management includes the management of materials, information, and financial flows
in a network consisting of suppliers, manufacturers, distributors, and customers. The coordination
and integration of these flows within and across companies are critical in effective Supply Chain
Management.
" Why manage the supply chain?
$ Lower sourcing costs of finished goods and raw materials
$ Improve customer service
$ Dramatically lower inventory levels
$ Leverage all resources to bring substantial benefits to a company
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Key Supply Chain Problems
Supply Chain
L
e
a
d

t
i
m
e
D
e
l
i
v
e
r
y

t
i
m
e
Suppliers
Plants
Customers
DCs
P
u
s
h
P
u
l
l
! Postponement
! Bullwhip Effect

" The key supply chain problem is the delivery time of products to the customer must be considerably
shorter than the production or the lead time. In order to realize this and guarantee a high delivery
service, inventory and safety stock must be built up at component or finished product level in plants
or distribution centers (DC).
" You use postponement strategies to define how far the sales order links with the supply chain; in
other words, where the decoupling of make-to-stock production (push strategies) (MTS), and make-
to-order production (pull strategies) (MTO), takes place.
" The bullwhip effect refers to an increase in variability of a (constant) demand pattern due to large
fluctuations at the manufacturer or the supplier as we move along the supply chain, triggered by lot
size creation.
" Implementing an Advanced Planning System (APS) does not solve supply chain problems. It is also
important that company bosses are prepared to consider making organizational changes to their
companies, or at least looking into the possible benefits.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Strategic Application Level
Core Business Application Level
Finance
Materials
Management
Production
Planning
Sales
HR
Open Systems
Scalability
Client-Server
Flexibility

Supply
Chain
Solutions
(APO)
liveCache
Integration
Customer
Relationship
Management
(CRM)
Logistics
Core level
Database
structure
Interfaces
Development
tools
Communication
Non-R/3
Systems
Electronic
Commerce
B2B
Business
Information
Warehouse
(BW)
SAP's Total Supply Chain Solution
Strategic
Enterprise
Management
(SEM)
R/3

Advantages of APO
" High performance using liveCache technology
" Global server: Integrates multiple OLTP systems
" Collaborative planning via the Internet
" Simultaneous material and finite capacity requirements planning
" Cross-plant optimization of the resource load
" Sequence and setup time optimization of orders
" Transportation optimization with route planning
" Evaluation and analysis of orders
" Seamless integration between the APO and R/3 Systems
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Levels of Supply Chain Management
Decision of direction for the company
Supply Chain Design
Network Design (ND)
Operational aggregated planning (tactical
planning)
Aggregated sales and
demand planning Demand
Planning (DP)
Supply Network Planning
(SNP)
Ext. proc. planning Production
planning
Delivery planning
P
a
r
t
n
e
r
P
a
r
t
n
e
r
External procurement
Production
Outbound
delivery
External
procurement at
customer
Operational detailed planning (operational
planning)
Execution
Planning
S
u
p
p
l
i
e
r
C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
S
u
p
p
l
y

C
h
a
i
n

C
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
r
k
e
t
p
l
a
c
e

i
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
i
o
n
S
u
p
p
l
y

C
h
a
i
n

C
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
r
k
e
t
p
l
a
c
e

i
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
i
o
n
Strategy planning
Tactical planning: strategy realization and infrastructure planning (plan infrastructure)
SNP PP/DS SNP ATP, TP/VS PP/DS
for example,
LES, MM
for example,
PP
for example, LES,
MM, SD

" In Supply Chain Management, there is a planning level and an execution level. Within the
planning level APS systems are used (APS = Advanced Planning Systems) and at the execution
level, ERP systems (ERP = Enterprise Resource Planning) are used. The planning level is divided
into different levels depending on if the decisions are strategic, tactical or operational. The criteria
for deciding what belongs to which planning level is not primarily the planning horizon but rather the
scope of the planning. Each hierarchically superior level determines the ranges of the planning levels
below it.
" Strategic level (strategy planning): Comparatively unstructured and simple planning tools such as
portfolio techniques (product life cycle analysis, Boston Consulting Group portfolios, and McKinsey
portfolios, for example) are used to make decisions about the direction of the company (such as
product diversification strategies, quality strategies, and cost leadership).
" Tactical level (strategy realization and infrastructure planning): Decisions about direction are
realized at this level when the company is restructured based on strategies. Tactical planning is
decisive for operational planning and execution because it forms the planning environment within
the company (planning personnel, IT systems for planning, implementation and setting parameters,
and planning processes) as well as the part of the company that physically executes (such as factory
planning, personnel planning, transportation planning, and logistically-relevant IT system for
execution). This links the operational planning level and the execution level.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

" Operational level (operational aggregated and detailed planning): Structured, recurring planning
based on tactical realization decisions such as strategies for settling sales orders and pre-planning,
which are not questioned again in operational planning. Operational planning is also long-term to
bridge bottlenecks that will occur in the future, such as early planning for seasonal requirements or
planning runs to determine components with longer replenishment times. Planning for the future is
usually done objectively or based on time since planning data is uncertain. Aggregated planning also
serves to redirect tactical planning if necessary (for example, additional shifts, additional capacity,
and outline agreements with suppliers.) Detailed planning attempts to optimally use the logistic
system within the limits set by tactical and aggregated planning and based on the most current data.
" Execution level: Along with the development of the product (production, stock transfer, sorting,
receipt, delivery), administrative activities are also performed at the execution level. These activities
are supported by execution systems, for example, when papers for production (production orders) are
printed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Planning Components
APO Product Map Monitor
Tactical
Detailed Planning
Scheduling
Supply Chain Cockpit
Supply Network
Planning
Production
Planning
&
Detailed
Scheduling
Sales
Planning
BUY
Purchasing
Distribution
Planning
&
Deployment
Transportation
Planning
&
Vehicle
Scheduling
Network Design
MAKE STORE MOVE SELL
Global Available-to-Promise
Agg. Planning

" Supply Chain Cockpit: A graphic tool for evaluating and controlling the supply chain.
" Network Design: Strategic planning for analyzing, optimizing, and reorganizing the supply chain.
Long-term sourcing, production, and distribution decisions are supported here.
" Demand Planning (DP): Aggregated and detailed demand planning with a variety of forecasting
techniques based on aggregated sales figures.
" Supply Network Planning (SNP): Finite, cross-location, mid to long-term production and
procurement planning with simultaneous material planning and capacity scheduling. Deployment is
used to plan short-term replenishment.
" Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS): Finite, detailed production planning. PP/DS
uses simultaneous material planning and capacity scheduling, and optimization techniques to
generate feasible plans that are in the optimum sequence with the optimum setup times.
" Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS): Optimizes use of transportation vehicles
and selection of carriers. Generates deliveries and shipments.
" Global Available-to-Promise (ATP): Rules-based availability check that is integrated with
production planning and product allocation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Network Design
Strategic Supply Chain Planning

" Network Design is a component used specifically for strategic planning. Use this tool to make
assignment decisions (relationships between individual locations and assignment of products to
locations), as well as additional decisions regarding locations (location determination and location
selection), taking account of demand and cost structures. Network Design can also be implemented
for regular evaluation of the existing supply chain in order to discover any weaknesses and take any
necessary measures.
" There are four methods available in Network Design for planning the supply chain network. These
methods optimize either geographical distances or costs, in each case taking the demand structures
into account.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Purchasing
(MM)
Production Planning (PP)
APO Planning Sequence with R/3 Integration
Demand Planning (DP)
Conversion
Flexible Planning
R/3 or non-SAP system APO
Supply Network Planning (SNP)
Prod. Plng & Det. Schedlng (PP/DS)
Planned ind.reqmts
Sales order
Consumption
Sales order
Sales &
Distribution (SD)
Demand
management
Planned ind.reqmts
Transp. Plng & Veh. Schedlng (TP/VS)
Deploy
-ment
Logistics Execution System
(LES)
Release,
Confirmations
Planned order
Production order
Purchase requisition
Purchase order
Stock transport requisition
Stock transport order
Planned order
Production order
Purchase order
Stock transport
requisition
Planned delivery
Delivery
Delivery
Transfer order
Planned shipment / Shipment
Execution

" In APO Demand Planning (DP), you base forecasts on aggregated historical data from the R/3
Systemor Business Information Warehouse (BW) system (such as sales quantities from past sales
orders). You use the Administrator Workbench in APO to upload aggregated historical data from the
R/3 System or BW System. In APO Demand Planning you generate planned independent
requirements (release forecast to APO Demand Planning) that are used for make-to-stock planning.
" Sales orders and planned independent requirements form the starting point for Supply Network
Planning (SNP), Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) and TP/VS in APO. Existing
storage location stock is also included in the planning. Sales orders are entered in the R/3 System
(sales module) but the availability check (or ATP check-Available to Promise) is done in APO.
" In Supply Network Planning (SNP) you plan for the short- or mid-term horizon for the entire
supply chain: you generate stock transport requisitions (for planning and stock transfer) between
distribution centers and plants, and can also generate planned orders (for in-house production
planning) and purchase requisitions (for external procurement planning) directly in the production
plant for the longer term.
" Transaction data generated in APO (such as planned orders) is transferred to the R/3 System
through the R/3 APO interface (CIF: Core Interface).
" As soon as planned orders and purchase requisitions get closer to the today-line, the stock planner or
buyer can collectively convert planned orders into production orders and purchase requisitions into
purchase orders. You use the APO Deployment/TLB (Transport Load Builder) to convert stock
transport requisitions into stock transport orders.
" APO is a planning tool: Execution functions such as release, confirmation, material staging, or
goods movement for production orders or purchase orders are performed in the R/3 System.
Confirmation and other data is then transferred back to APO from the R/3 System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

" You create planned deliveries and shipments in Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling
(TP/VS). In APO, TP/VS different deliveries can also be grouped together into one shipment. It is
then possible to convert planned deliveries and planned shipments into real deliveries and shipments
and transfer them to the R/3 System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Retail outlet
Distribution
centers
Production
units
Suppliers
Functions of Demand Planning
! Cross-company Demand
Planning (Internet)
! Consistent, detailed, and
consolidated plans
! Statistical and causal
forecasting techniques
! Lifecycle planning
! Promotion planning

" Demand Planning is a complex, powerful, and flexible tool that supports your company's demand
planning process. User-specific planning layouts and interactive planning books not only allow you
to include different departments, you can also use them to include other companies in the forecast
creation process. With APO Demand Planning you can use statistical forecasting methods and
advanced macro techniques to create forecasts from sales history based on many different causal
factors, You can test predefined, and user-defined forecast models, and forecast results, and use a
consensus-based approach to consolidate the demand plans of different departments. You can use
forecast overrides and promotions to add marketing intelligence and management adjustments. The
seamless integration with APO Supply Network Planning supports an efficient Sales and Operations
Planning (S&OP) process.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Manufacturer Supplier Customer
Collaboration
with Suppliers
Collaboration
with Customers
! Demand plans
! Promotions
! Stock levels
! Delivery dates
! Product requirements
! Production dates
! Procurement
! Delivery dates
High efficiency, precise information and short lead
times to improve delivery of service
Supply Chain Optimization
Collaborative Planning in APO

" The term collaborative planning refers to the process that makes it possible for different companies
along the supply chain to access cross-company information over the Internet, with the common goal
of identifying bottlenecks or date shifts as early as possible.
" Collaborative planning allows the company to exchange demand, procurement, and stock data with
its partners. You can define your own exception messages (alerts) and integrate them into the general
alert management. If exceptions occur during planning, mail or fax messages can be generated
automatically. APO Collaborative Planning supports the CPFR standard.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Supply Network
Planning
Supply Network Planning (SNP)
Gra
ph
Des
ign
Capacity
Leveling
APO - Product Tota
l
APO - Product Tota
l
Selection Profile
Screen Title
Grid Title
Key Figure 1
Key Figure 3
Key Figure 2
Key Figure 4
Key Figure 5
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
User
Selection ID
W 24 W 25 W 26 W 28 W 27
Planning Book
Grid 2 Title
Key Figure 1
Key Figure 3
Key Figure 2
Key Figure 4
Key Figure 5
W 24 W 25 W 26 W 28 W 27
ID Object Text
Text 1
Text 2
Text 3
Text 4

" SNP Planning plans on a mid to long-term basis. It creates a rough quantity-based, cross-location
production and distribution plan with individual rough bills of material (BOM) and routings.
" The SNP BOM contains critical products that are produced on bottleneck resources and products
with a long replenishment lead time.
" SNP ensures that the right quantity is available on the right day without critical resources being
overloaded. The smallest unit used for scheduling is days.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Supply Network Planning Scenario
! SNP plans the material flow along the supply chain
! Mid to long-term, finite, cross-plant planning
! Prioritization of demands; supply optimization
! Result: Feasible plans
Demand Plan
Supplier Plant DC
Customer

" The role of Supply Network Planning includes:
$ Planning supply to meet demand
$ Integrating purchasing, production, and distribution in one consistent model in the entire supply
network
$ Synchronizing activities and planning material flow along the supply chain
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Comparison of Mid- and Short-Term Planning
Production
horizon
Forecasts Sales orders Forecasts Sales orders
Supply Network Planning Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling
SNP planned orders
Stock transfers
PP/DS planned orders
Stock transfers
SNP BOM and routing
Cross-plant finite planning
Distribution and procurement
Quantity and bucket-oriented
No pegging
PP/DS BOM and routing
Finite, detailed planning per location
Sequences and setup times
Continuous and order-related
Pegging
Time

" SNP integrates purchasing, manufacturing, distribution, and transportation so that comprehensive
tactical planning and sourcing decisions can be simulated and implemented on the basis of a single,
global consistent model.
" SNP uses advanced optimization techniques, based on constraints and penalties, to plan product flow
along the supply chain. The result is optimal purchasing, production, and distribution decisions,
reduced order fulfillment times and inventory levels, and improved customer service.
" Pegging is the link between receipts and issues along the supply chain. When an order is shifted, all
dependent orders can be adjusted automatically.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Production Planning/
Detailed Scheduling
Production Planning / Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)

" Supply Network Planning (SNP) is usually used for initial mid to long-term planning over the
entire supply chain (in particular, when there are several plants and distribution centers). Production
Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) is usually used for to-the-minute, short-term planning
in a production plant.
$ In Supply Network Planning (SNP) demands are aggregated for a specified bucket (day for
example). It is irrelevant whether a requirement falls within an early or a late shift, as requirements
are only initially planned here. Planning does not include break times. The sequence of orders is
not an SNP time consideration. Cross-plant planning, and mid- to long-term planning in the
production plant do all play an important role in Supply Network Planning.
$ Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling schedules orders to-the-minute (meaning that
shifts and breaks are included here), and does include order sequences (sequencing and
optimization of sequences). In the short-term, these functions are highly important for the
production plant.
" As soon as a requirement (such as a sales order or planned independent requirement) falls within a
specific horizon, it is no longer planned in the SNP planning run, but instead in the production
planning run of PP/DS.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Customer
Functions of Production Planning/Detailed
Scheduling (PP/DS)
! Plans production, external
procurement, and stock transfer
within the production plant to-the-
minute
! Plans simultaneous material
requirements and schedules finite
capacity at operation level for the
short-term
! Takes order sequences into
account
! Optimizes machine schedules
(sequences and lead times)
! Transfers the planning results to
an execution system (such as the
R/3 Shop Floor Control)
Time
Resource 3
Resource 2
Resource 1
30
20
10
Resource 1
Resource 2
Resource 3

" Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) is used mainly for short-term, to-the-
minute planning (both for in-house production and external procurement) in the production plant.
PP/DS schedules and plans all operations of an order that are relevant for planning the different
resources. PP/DS has the following functions:
$ It generates planned orders (to plan in-house production), and purchase requisitions or scheduling
agreement schedule lines (to plan external procurement) in the event of product shortage by using
simultaneous material and capacity requirements planning to do this: You can define
resources as finite resources (planning-critical resources) in the resource master. Order operations
are only created at these resources if there is sufficient capacity for the order quantity on the
corresponding date. When there is no available capacity, the system searches for a date on which
the order operation can be carried out, taking account of the capacity situation.
$ Takes order sequences into account: When new in-house production orders are created, the
setup times in the new order can be determined automatically from the setup status of the
resources (depending on the preceding order).
$ It is possible to display the orders in graphic format (in the detailed scheduling planning board),
and to sequence from there. You can use also the optimizer to execute a sequencing.
$ Machine scheduling optimization: During planning, it is possible for orders to be generated that
do not have an optimum order sequence. Therefore, you can change the sequence and resource
assignments of existing orders using the optimization run.
" PP/DS is a planning tool. Execution functions such as confirmations and goods receipts are
performed in the execution system (for example, the R/3 System). Therefore, the planning results are
transferred to the execution system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Deployment adjusts the stock transfers for short-term changes
on both the supply and demand side (distribution detailed planning)
Deployment
Chicago
Winnipeg
Calgary
Customer
DC2
DC1
Plant
! Fair Share
" Proportional distribution
" Proportional target
fulfillment
" Quota arrangements
! Push deployment
" Push horizon

" The deployment function in SNP determines how and when inventory and planned supplies are
deployed to distribution centers, customers, and vendor-managed inventory (VMI) accounts. It
generates optimized replenishment plans that take into account short-term changes on the supply or
demand side, as well as constraints, such as transportation and storage capabilities.
" A variety of deployment strategies are used depending on the current situation (for example, fair
share, push deployment, and, pull-push deployment).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Rules
Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP)
! Event-driven
! Internet capabilities
! Rules-based ATP:
" Location substitution
" Product substitution
! Integration with PP/DS
! Product allocations
! High performance (time series)
Is it possible to deliver the product
in the required quantity, and on the
required date?

" You use Global ATP (Available To Promise) to check product availability and capacities, to provide
customers with reliable confirmation dates for their sales orders. ATP checks are triggered from the
OLTP system (R/3 System, or non-SAP system) as an event (event-driven). In the interface with
APO you can specify that the ATP check is to be done in APO and not the R/3 System. For example,
if you create a sales order in the R/3 System, the system first checks if there is enough of the
requested product in stock. The system can also check if receipts (for example, production orders and
planned orders) have already been planned by the requested date.
" Global ATP has the following functions:
$ Rules-based ATP: When there is no stock available, it is possible in APO to set it so that the
system does an ATP check for the product at another location or else substitutes an alernative
product for (location and product substitution).
$ Integration with PP/DS: You can set Global ATP so that when a product is not available, the
sales order directly triggers production. If it triggers an order for in-house production, APO creates
a planned order for the required quantity in PP/DS.
$ Product allocations: Product allocation allows you to manage the supply of scarce products to
customers, so that each customer only receives an allocated amount.
$ Time series: Planned orders and production orders are aggregated and represented in a time series,
which can be used to evaluate the incoming requests from the sales orders. This improves
performance of the ATP check.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
LES (Execution)
Transportation
Planning
Vehicle
Scheduling
APO
! Long or mid-term bucket oriented
planning. Use DP/SNP to determine
aggregate transportation
requirements.
! Short-term order-based planning
using TPVS to consolidate/route
transportation requirements
BW
(Monitoring)
Transportation Management: Planning Solution

" The TP/VS component has the following functions:
$ Transportation planning and transportation consolidation
$ Vehicle scheduling and route determination in a dynamic environment
$ Transportation mode and carrier selection
$ Multi-pick up and multi-drop functions
$ Management by exception
" The APO system includes the tactical and operational planning area from the SAP Transportation
Management solution, which is complemented for transportation execution by the R/3 System
component from the Logistics Execution System (LES).
" Transportation Business Content is available in BW 2.0B Connection to the R/3 System from
Release 4.0B and higher. BW provides a dynamic monitoring and reporting tool for the TP/VS
environment.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Deployment/Transport Deployment/Transport
Load Builder Load Builder
Supply Network Supply Network
Planning Planning
Demand Planning Demand Planning
Production Planning Production Planning
Detailed Scheduling Detailed Scheduling
Vehicle Scheduling Vehicle Scheduling
Forecast Forecast
Transportation
Planning / Deployment
Planned Prod Planned Prod
Orders Orders
Planned Planned
Delivery Items Delivery Items
Planned Planned
Shipments Shipments
Unconstrained
Aggregate Planning
Constrained
Mid-term
Sourcing/Replen.
Constrained
Detailed Planning
Constrained
Load Consolidation
Delivery Scheduling
APO Planning Process
Stock Transfer Stock Transfer
Orders Orders

" Supply Network Planning is used for long-term to mid-term planning. A major advantage of this
component is the Sourcing function, which allows you to specify at which location which product is
procured and how it is to be procured. Sourcing is optimized using functions such as Deployment
and the Transport Load Builder (TLB). Bucket capacities, which show the most detailed level for
day planning, are used for product planning in Supply Network Planning
" Vehicle Scheduling (VS) is a component for short-term planning. You can define planning horizons
for both Supply Network Planning and Vehicle Scheduling. These horizons are independent of each
other and must be planned separately.
" In Vehicle Scheduling, the resources and transportation processes are maintained in detail to allow
for very exact planning.
" When the orders from Supply Network Planning are converted to VS orders, the following occurs:
$ The orders are put in a certain order.
$ The exact move time is determined.
$ Information and operations still required are added (data and operations that are not required for
Supply Network Planning but are necessary for Vehicle Scheduling, such as loading activities).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transport Load Builder (SNP)
Transport Load Builder (SNP)
Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS)
Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS)
Differences Between TLB and TP/VS
! Provides a Preliminary Transportation Plan for Supply Network
Planning (or may serve as the tool of choice for plant/DC replenishment
legs)
! Consolidates Loads for Single Transportation Leg
(creating a single delivery/shipment between two locations)
! Provides a Detailed Transportation Schedule for Inbound and
Outbound Shipments (and/or replenishment)
! Consolidates Loads for Multiple Transportation Legs
(creating an optimum delivery schedule for multi drops/pickups)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO optimization solutions
Optimization Solutions
A complete range of optimization solutions
adjusted to the planning tasks
Linear programming/
mixed/whole number
programming
Genetic algorithm
constraint-based
programming
Local search
+ Constraint
programming
Supply
Network
Design +
Planning
Production Planning/
Detailed Scheduling
Transportation
planning

" The following optimizers are available in APO: Optimizer for CTM, optimizer for PP/DS, optimizer
for Network Design, optimizer for Sequence Planning, optimizer for Supply Network Planning, and
optimizer for Transportation Planning.
" In Supply Network Planning, optimization problems usually can be solved with an exact
mathematical solution procedure (which can be solved using linear equations). For this reason,
linear programming is used for optimization in Supply Network Planning. Linear programming is
able to calculate an exact solution.
" In Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) however, there are usually more
complex optimization problems for which no exact solutions can be found. Therefore, linear
programming is less suited for PP/DS. Instead, solutions approximate an optimum or exact solution.
Approximate optimization procedures are therefore more suited to be used in PP/DS (genetic
algorithm/constraint-based programming). This allows the optimization system to find a suitable
solution faster.
" The different optimizers can be installed on the same server on which the APO application, the
liveCache, and the database are all installed (but you can also install them on different servers). The
APO application server and the optimizer are linked via a TCP/IP connection. Here you specify
whether the optimizer is to be called on the APO application server or on a different server
(transaction sm59).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Explain the advantages of APO
! List the components of APO
! Understand the integration between the APO
components
APO Overview: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: APO Overview
Topic: Overview of APO Components

List the components of the Adavanced Planner and Organizer.
Describe the basic function of each component.
Understand the integration between the components.

The Advanced Planner and Optimizer product includes a number
of planning tools that can be used to plan various enterprise
functions such as production, plant stocks, and transportation.
One of its most powerful features is the integration between the
components, which such that it can provides a total supply chain
optimization solution. As a member of the TP/VS project team, it
is important for you to understand the relationship between
various components and the transportation planning function.
1-1 Within supply chain management, there is a planning level and an execution level.
APO provides components at the _______________ level and the R/3 System
provides ERP for the ________________________ level.
1-2 There are three levels of planning . They are:
1) _________________________________________
2) _________________________________________
3) _________________________________________
1-3 The APO components PP/DS and TP/VS are examples of components used for
________________________________ planning.
1-4 Network Design (ND) is an example of _________________________ planning.
1-5 True or False: Supply Network Planning (SNP) is usually used for short- term
planning over the entire supply chain.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-6 Which of the following are not components of APO:
a) Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
b) Demand Planning (DP)
c) Supply Network Planning (SNP)
d) Task and Resource Management (TRM)
e) Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)
f) Transportation Planning / Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS)
g) Global Available-to-Promise (GATP)
1-7 True or False: Planned independent requirements from Demand Planning are one of
the inputs to Supply Network Planning.
1-8 True or False: Sales orders and planned independent requirements are input to
Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling.
1-9 The term ____________________________________________
refers to the process that makes it possible for different companies along the supply
chain to all access cross-company information over the internet.
1-10 A major difference between planning by the Transport Load Builder (TLB) and
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) is that TLB consolidates loads for a _________________
transportation leg, whereas VS provides load consolidation for
_______________________ legs.
1-11 The TP/VS component of APO uses the optimization technique called
___________________________________________.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Unit: APO Overview
Topic: Overview of APO Components

1-1 Within supply chain management, there is a planning level and an execution level.
APO provides components at the planning level and the R/3 System provides ERP
for the execution level.
1-2 There are three levels of planning . They are:
Strategic
Tactical
Operational
1-3 The APO components PP/DS and TP/VS are examples of components used for
short-term planning.
1-4 Network Design (ND) is an example of strategic planning.
1-5 True or False. Supply Network Planning (SNP) is usually used for mid- to long-
term planning over the entire supply chain.
1-6 Which of the following are not components of APO:
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
Task and Resource Management (TRM)
1-7 True or False. Planned independent requirements from Demand Planning are one
of the inputs to Supply Network Planning.
1-8 True or False. Sales orders and planned independent requirements are input to
Production Planning/Detailed Scheduling.
1-9 The term collaborative planning refers to the process that makes it possible for
different companies along the supply chain to all access cross-company information
over the internet.
1-10 A major difference between planning by the Transport Load Builder (TLB) and
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) is that TLB consolidates loads for a single transportation
leg, whereas VS provides load consolidation for multiple legs.
1-11 The TP/VS component of APO uses the optimization technique called tabular
search.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Integration and Master Data
Contents:
! APO Integration
! Core Interface
! RFC Links
! Master Data Objects
! Integration Models
! Transfer of Master Data

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Understand the RFC links between the APO
and the R/3 Systems and the R/3 System and
the APO System
! Name the APO master data objects
! Describe the concept of initial and incremental
data transfer of master data from an R/3
System into an APO System
! Create an integration model for the transfer of
master data in a APO TP/VS environment
! Transfer master data
APO Integration and Master Data: Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The PC manufacturer uses the R/3 System as an
execution system and APO for planning. The Core
Interface (CIF) provides a close integration of the
systems. Information can be exchanged in real-
time, including both master and transaction data.
! To use the APO system as a planning system, the
PC manufacturer must transfer key master data to
the APO environment using the CIF. Establish
various methods to provide for the initial data
transfer and ongoing updates of master data.
APO Integration and Master Data: Business
Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the RFC link between APO and the
R/3 System(s) in an APO R/3 landscape
! Describe the APO Core Interface
! Describe the R/3 Plug-in technology
APO Integration: Topic Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Integration (1)
R/3 -> APO
Master data
! Plants, vendors, customers
! Materials
! Work centers (capacities)
! Routings and bills of
material
! ...
Transaction data
! Sales orders
! Planned/production orders
! Purchase orders
! Supplies
! ...
APO -> R/3
Planning results
! Manufacturing orders
! Order proposals
! Result of availability
check
! ...
R/3
4.6C
R/3
4.6C
APO
BW

" As a rule, the SAP-APO System is used in connection with other components of the SAP System or
with non-SAP Systems. There are two different integration concepts:
$ Linkage with non-R/3 Systems: The required interfaces are implemented as Business Application
Programming Interfaces (BAPIs).
$ Linkage with R/3 Systems (one or more): The required interface is marked as an APO Core
Interface (CIF). A mutual system connection has been set up in Customizing to enable the system
to transfer data relevant for the planning processes, from the execution R/3 System into APO, and
also to return the planning results from APO into the R/3.
" The main tasks of the APO Core Interface include:
$ Determining the source and target system in complex system environments
$ Providing the SAP-APO System with the relevant master and transaction data
$ Transferring data changes (transaction data)
$ Returning planning results to the execution system (R/3 or external system).
" TP/VS was introduced in Release 3.0A of APO and is intended for use in R/3 System Releases 4.6C
and higher. It's also possible to integrate TP/VS by using Release 4.6B and Plug-in 2001.1 or higher,
by contacting development.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Integration (2)
SD SD
LO LO
HR HR
SAP R/3 SAP R/3
SAP APO SAP APO
Non-
R/3 System
Non Non- -
R/3 System R/3 System
BAPI
BAPI
BAPI
CIF
(Core Interface)
BAPIs

" The APO Core Interface (CIF) is responsible for the data exchange between the APO and R/3
Systems. The APO CIF is a real-time interface that links APO with one or several R/3 Systems.
" The system only transfers the data objects needed in the data structures in APO for the different
planning and optimization processes, from the complex dataset of the R/3 into APO.
" The APO Core Interface guarantees both the initial data transfer (initial transfer) and the data
changes (transfer of data changes) within APO.
" The outbound delivery from APO CIF takes place as an R/3 Plug-in.
" The integration of R/3 with the CIF is possible as of release 3.1I. Earlier releases or an R/2 System
can be connected with BAPIs as Non-R/3 Systems.
" TP/VS was introduced in Release 3.0A of APO and is intended for use in R/3 Releases 4.6C and
higher. You need Plug-in 2000.2 or higher. It's also possible to integrate TP/VS by using Release
4.6B and Plug-in 2001.1 or higher, by contacting development.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Integration (3)
R/3 APO
Order
Production
Procurement
Replenishment
live
Cache
live
Cache
Location
Product
Resource
Production
process model
Plant, customer,...
Material master
Capacity
Routing and
bill of material
Sales order
Planned order
Production order
Purchase order
Delivery
Shipment
...
CIF
CIF
Real-time

" The planning in APO is based on its own master data, which is usually transferred automatically
from a R/3 System, but can also be created manually.
" The transfer of master data from the R/3 System is represented in the corresponding master data in
APO. Only the master data relevant for planning in APO is transferred (firstly in the form of an
initial transfer, and then later as a transfer of data changes).
" The R/3 System remains the execution system for the master data. You can only maintain the
settings that the system cannot transfer from the R/3 directly into APO.
" The system transfers the transaction data relevant for planning, such as warehouse stock and sales or
purchase orders, from the R/3 into APO via the CIF interface. And vice versa, the results of the
planning in APO are returned to the R/3 via CIF and then performed there. This integration of
transaction data generally takes place in real-time.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3 Plug-In Technology
Information on R/3 Plug-in: SAPNet/R3-Plug-in
R/3
R/3
Plug-in
BBP
CRM
BW
APO
SEM
CIF

" An R/3 interface is marked with an R/3 Plug-in, to enable the system to integrate a mySAP
component (for example, APO or BW) with one or more R/3 Systems. With R/3 Plug-ins, several
mySAP components can be inserted at the same time. Most Plug-ins concern Add-Ons (R/3 standard
software enhancements with additional functions).
" Plug-ins supply the components with transaction and master data. In this way, the CIF interface does
not only provide the APO System with initial data records (initial supply), it also guarantees a step-
by-step supply with all the relevant data changes. The system only transfers the object data relevant
for the individual planning and optimization process in APO, from the complex data records into
R/3. The integration between R/3 and APO is possible as of Release 3.1I. For TP/VS, it is possible as
of Release 4.6C and restricted as of release 4.6B.
" For easy integration from R/3 and APO, it is necessary to install a Plug-In relevant to the R/3 release.
Support packages are also delivered for the Plug ins.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
RFC: Link Between R/3 and APO
R/3 APO
Remote
Function
Call (RFC)
Core Interface
(selection and
extraction of
data)
Core Interface Core Interface
(selection and (selection and
extraction of extraction of
data) data)
Master/
transaction data
Master/
transaction data
APO master/ APO master/
transaction data transaction data
live
Cache
live
Cache

" A RFC (Remote Function Call) connection connects an SAP R/3 System and an APO System. The
system transfers the data that is selected with the Core Interface (CIF) via this connection. To avoid
confusion, an example of a data transfer from the R/3 into the APO System is shown on the diagram.
The transfer of transaction data from APO to the R/3 System also takes place with RFC technology.
" The R/3 is a database-orientated system that stores the data in the database. The APO System, on the
other hand, is available next to the classic database via the LiveCache (main memory orientated).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Structure of a RFC Link: Overview
Between an R/3 and an APO System
1. Naming logical systems
2. Assign logical systems to clients
3. Define RFC destinations
% Names for R/3 and APO exist in the R/3
% Names for R/3 and APO exist in APO
% The logical R/3 System is assigned to R/3 clients
% The logical APO System is assigned to APO clients
% Target host for the logical R/3 System is known
% Target host for the logical APO System is known
4. Establish target systems
% The APO target system is known in R/3
5. Specify APO release
% The release of the APO target system is known

" A RFC connection sets up communication between an R/3 System and an APO System.
" The system defines logical system names. In R/3 and APO, a logical system is named for both the
R/3 and the APO Systems.
" The system assigns logical systems to the R/3 and APO clients.
" The system determines the actual RFC destination by specifying a physical connection for the logical
system. The RFC destination also contains the logon data for the relevant system.
" The system defines the APO target destination from the view of the R/3 System, and vice versa.
There is an obvious connection between both systems.
" Enter the release of the APO System in step five.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
APO Integration with Non-R/3 Systems
SD SD
LO LO
HR HR
SAP R/3 SAP R/3
SAP APO SAP APO
Non-
R/3 System
Non Non- -
BAPI
BAPI
BAPI
BAPIs
CIF
(Core Interface)

" The data exchange between APO and non-R/3 Systems takes place via BAPIs.
" BAPIs are documented standard interfaces that provide object-orientated access to SAP Systems (via
C++, Java, Visual Basic, IDOCs, COM/DCOM, DelphiConnect, and so on).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
data transfer of master data from an R/3
System into an APO System
APO Master Data: Topic Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Master Data Objects of the CIF
R/3
APO
Location
Product
Resource
Transportation Zones
R/3 master data APO master data
Plant
Customer
Vendor
Material master
Transportation
Zones
Initial transfer
Incremental data transfer

" The APO Core Interface concerns a real-time interface. The system only transfers the data objects
from the complex dataset in R/3 into APO, that are needed in the data structures of APO. These
objects have been determined to be required for the respective planning and optimization processes.
" Both the initial data transfer (initial transfer) and the data changes (transfer of data changes) within
APO take place using the APO Core Interface.
" The master data objects in APO are not the same as those in the R/3 System. For the master data
transfer it is the relevant R/3 master data that is displayed in the corresponding planning master data
in APO.
" The R/3 System remains the source system for the master data. Maintain directly in APO the specific
APO master data that does not exist in the R/3 System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Initial Data Transfer of Master Data: Overview
1. Generate integration model Name
Target system
Plant
Material master
Resource
...
Determine name and APO
target system
Select master data
2. Activate integration model
Integration model is active
Master data will be transferred Start

" Define the integration model that controls the transfer of master and transaction data in the R/3
System. You can find the menu option Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer (the CIF
menu) under Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning Interface.
" The integration model distinguishes between master data and transaction data. Select the two types
of data in separate integration models and then transfer them separately.
" In the integration model, select the dataset (master or transaction data) that you want to transfer.
Specify the following in the integration model:
The APO target system for the data transfer
The data objects you want to transfer
" You can delete integration models that you no longer need. You must first deactivate these
integration models.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Generate Integration Model for Initial Data Transfer
Name PC
Target sys. APOCLNT800
Application MD
Material master
Customers
Plants
Vendors
Work centers
Production process models
Relevant materials
Material
Plant 1000
MRP type
Name + application = unique definition of integration model
APO APO
System System
Selection of master
data types
Selection criteria for
the master data
Execute Save
+
...
...

" The master data that the system will transfer for the first time (initial transfer), from the R/3 System
into the APO System, is defined in an integration model. The R/3 System generates this integration
model (transaction CFM1).
" An integration model is uniquely defined by its name and application. It is useful to create several
integration models with the same name but as different applications. Ensure that the data pools of
your integration models are generally not too big. This enables you to handle errors more easily.
" The target system that you specify in the integration model determines the APO System that the
master data is transferred into. The target system is a logical (APO) system that must have a RFC
connection.
" Use a particular integration model to specify which master data you want the system to transfer. First
specify the master data types that flow into the integration model. In the second step, you specify the
selection criteria to be used for the selection of the individual master data documents in the R/3
System.
" You complete the generation of the integration model by executing the model (this means that the
data objects of the model are compiled) and then you save it.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Activate Integration Model for Initial Data Transfer
Name PC
Target system APOCLNT800
Application MD
Integration model
"Activate"
Active/Inact.
PC APOCLNT800 MD
Start
Master data
in APO
R/3
Material master A
Material master A
Material master B
Material master A
Material master A
Material master A
Product B
Product A
10:00:00
APO

" To transfer data into APO, you must activate an integration model that has previously been
generated. You activate an integration model with the transaction Activate integration model
(transaction code CFM2) in the CIF.
" You can have several integration models active at a time.
" Choose the Start function to trigger the data transfer into APO. The master data, or the equivalent of
the R/3 master data will exist in the APO System when the run completes.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transfer New APO-Relevant Master Data (1)
PC APOCLNT800 MD
Start
New master data in
APO
Material master Q
R/3
Product Q
11:00:00
X0
New
Name PC
Application MD
Material master
MRP type
X0
...
PC APOCLNT800 MD 10:00:00
Execute Save
+
Existing integration model
"Activate"
Active/Inact.
Difference is transferred
APO

" New APO-relevant master data (in the example on the slide above, a new material with MRP type
X0), that corresponds with the selection criteria of an existing integration model (in the example,
materials with the MRP type X0 are selected in the integration model), can be transferred into APO.
The system regenerates the existing model (the new master data is also selected here) and then
activates it. Two models with the same name are then active, the only differences being the dates and
times. If the data transfer starts in this situation, the system simply transfers the difference data. The
system compares the existing, active integration models with the new model. After the data transfer,
the system deactivates the old integration model, leaving the new complete integration model as the
active model.
" If you want the system to retransfer all the master data of an existing integration model, you must
deactivate the old models and activate only the new one. A comparison of all active models then
takes place. As in this case, the model with the old time is not active, all data is transferred again.
" If you have activated model one with the material masters A and B, and activate a model two in the
second step with material masters B and C, then when you activate model two, only material C will
be transferred. Then when you deactivate model one, the integration for material B remains.
" To ensure that the system has transferred all the APO-relevant master data, periodically regenerate
and activate the existing integration models.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transfer New APO-Relevant Master Data (2)
Name PC
Application MD
Generate integration model
Name PC
Application MD
Activate integration model
Active/Inact.
...
Execute
Save
+
Variant
PC_MAT
RIMODGEN report
Variant
PC_MAT
Start
RIMODAC2 report
JOB_1
+
JOB_2
Alternative:
JOB_1_AND_2
Step 1
Step 2
Execute integration model periodically

" Defining jobs enables the system to regenerate and then activate the integration models in regular
intervals, as the R/3 System is constantly creating new APO-relevant master data.
" The system generates an integration model with the RIMODGEN report. You schedule this report by
entering a variant (that you must have defined previously) as a job.
" The system activates an integration model via the RIMODAC2 report. You need a variant for this
report too, in order to schedule it in a job.
" Executing an integration model consists of the generation and activation of an integration model.
You can schedule these two steps with a job, where you define the two activities as two consecutive
steps. For this procedure, you also need the relevant variants for both steps.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Incremental Data Transfer of Master Data (1)
Name PC
Applicat. MD
Material master
Relevant materials
Material
Plant 1000
MRP type
X0
...
...
Changes to APO-relevant master data are transferred. What
is APO-relevant master data?
Material A
Material B
Material C
...
PC APOCLNT800 MD
Integration model active
Materials (generally:
Master data) are
APO-relevant

" Any changes you make to the master data in the R/3 System that are also APO-relevant must be
transferred into the APO System. The system does not usually carry out a new initial data transfer,
but just transfers the individual changes to the master data. In the same way, the system also transfers
a deletion flag for a material into APO.
" An incremental data transfer assumes that an active integration model is available for the relevant
materials, and that the materials are APO-relevant.
" With the transfer of master data changes, remember that the system will transfer the complete data
record. For example, if you change a field in the material master, the entire material master will be
retransferred within the incremental data transfer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Incremental Data Transfer of Master Data (2)
Material master A
Matls. planning
Plan.del.time 10 days
11 days
Master data
change
Change pointer
Mat A plan.deliv.time
...
Mat B in-house pr.time
Customizing
Changed master
data in APO
Execute
Incremental
data transfer
Product A
Change pointer generally active?
Relevant message type
active?
Material master ...
Object types
Variant
DELTA_MD
MRP type X0
Incremental data transfer
APO

" The R/3 System is the dominant master data system. As a rule, the system performs changes to the
master data in the R/3 System and transfers them from there into the APO System. With master data
changes, it is not necessary for the system to totally retransfer all the master data as an initial data
transfer. Instead, the system can transfer just the changed master data.
" For an incremental data transfer, set in Customizing ALE change pointers that are written for master
data changes. First, you activate the change pointers (Activate change pointer in Customizing in
ALE, transaction BD61), before you determine (in Customizing, Change pointer per message type,
transaction BD50) which master data objects should have change pointers. (CIFMAT message type
for material masters, CIFVEN for vendors, CIFCUS for customers, and CIFSRC for info records)
" If you use transaction CFC5, the settings for the message types CIFMAT, CIFVEN, and CIFCUS are
automatically set.
" The process of incremental data transfer reverts to the ALE change pointer. This change pointer
selects the master data for the system to retransfer. When you call up the transaction Incremental
data transfer of master data (CFP1), specify the the logical target systems and the master data
objects (material masters, vendors, sources of supply, and customers), that have changes to be
transferred.
" You can save your settings for the incremental data transfer as variants, and, if necessary, use these
variants for the periodic scheduling of incremental data transfer as a job (RCPTRAN4 report).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Real-Time Transfer of Master Data Changes
Configuration procedure for transfer of master data changes
Transaction CFC5
Business Transaction Event, immed.
Material master
ALE change pointer, periodic
No incremental data transfer
Customers
Vendors
Changed R/3 System master
data objects are transferred
into APO when the changes
are saved in real-time
APO
Changes to R/3 System
master data objects are
recorded and the transfer of
the changes is (periodically,
for example) triggered

" The system can transfer changes to APO-relevant master data (data contained in an active integration
model) the material master, customer, and vendor in real-time (directly when updating a data change
in the R/3 System) into the APO System.
" Access the settings for this function with transaction CFC5. In real-time transfer, the system transfers
the complete data record that has been changed directly to the APO System (for numerous changes
there are corresponding repercussions on the system performance). In the periodic transfer, the
system collects and transfers the master data changes into the APO System, within a normal
incremental data transfer. The incremental data transfer can finally be deactivated.
" You can control the incremental data transfer of master data with transaction CFC5. If the
incremental data transfer is set to Business Transaction Event, immediately, the processing takes
place without using change pointers. If the incremental data transfer is set periodically, the change
pointers are automatically activated.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transfer Master Data Changes Periodically
Evaluate and send change recordings
Execute
Variant
DELTA_MD
RCPTRAN4 report
JOB_DELTA
Material master
Customers
...
Object types
Schedule periodically
Current master data
in APO
APO

" This gives you the chance to periodically schedule the transfer of master data changes as a job.
Define a variant (containing the target system and the selection of master data objects) for the
RCPTRAN4 report (hidden behind transaction CFP1), and define the job.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Integration Model: Other Functions
Deactivate integration model
+
Connection between the R/3 and APO Systems for
the relevant master and movement data will be
cancelled
+
Deactivated models can be deleted
+
You can check the consistency of the selected data
in the integration model
Delete integration model
Consistency check
+
Check whether the data objects are already
contained within an integration model
Filter object search

" Deactivate integration model: For example, relevant sales orders created in the R/3 Systemare no
longer transmitted to APO after you deactivate the integration model for movement data (that
contains sales and planned orders). Planned orders that are created in APO after deactivation of the
integration model are not transmitted to APO either. After you deactivate the integration model for
master data, no data changes are transmitted.
" Delete integration model: Deleting an integration model does not mean that the previously selected
data in APO is also deleted. Note: For master data contained within an active integration model for
which you have set a deletion flag in the R/3 System, the deletion flag is transmitted to APO using
initial data transfer).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the RFC link between the APO and the
R/3 Systems and the R/3 System and the APO
System
! Describe the APO Core Interface
! Describe the R/3 Plug-in technology
data transfer of master data from an R/3 System
into an APO System
APO Integration and Master Data : Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: APO Integration and Master Data
Topic: APO Integration

At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
Review the settings of the RFC connection between an R/3 System
and an APO System.

Before you familiarize yourself with the functions of the CIF interace,
review the RFC connection that connects the R/3 System with the APO
System.
1-1 During the exercises, an R/3 System is linked to an APO System. Linking these
systems is based on a RFC connection that connects two logical systems.
1-1-1 With which R/3 client are you working? _________________
1-1-2 View in R/3 Customizing the logical system name assigned to your client.
Note the logical name of the R/3 System: ________________
1-1-3 With which APO client are you working with? ________________
1-1-4 View in Customizing of the APO System the logical system name assigned
to your client.
Note the logical names of the APO System: _________________
1-2 In the next step, view the RFC connection between the two systems.
1-2-1 In the R/3 System, display the RFC connection to the APO System. This
connection contains the name of the logical APO System that you noted
above. Which user name is used for logon to the APO System?
______________________________________
1-2-2 In the APO System, display the RFC connection to the R/3 System. This
connection contains the name of the logical R/3 System that you noted
above. Which user name is used for logon to the R/3 System?
______________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Master Data

At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
Prepare R/3 material masters for planning in APO
Create a simple integration model for an initial data transfer and
execute the transfer.

The pump T-F1## should be planned in APO. Therefore, you first prepare
the material master in the R/3 for planning in APO, and then create an
integration model to transfer into APO.
2-1 The material T-F1## should be planned in APO. A materials planning in the R/3
System is controlled by the MRP type that you enter in the material master. If a
material is not to be planned in the R/3 System, it must have the corresponding
MRP type.
2-1-1 Display the X0 MRP type in the R/3 Customizing. Which MRP procedure
is entered in this MRP type?
_________________________________________
2-1-2 What effect is the effect of this MRP procedure?
_________________________________________
2-1-3 Which planning method is entered in this MRP type (in Additional selection
parameters)?
_________________________________________
2-2 Change the material master T-F1## in Plant 1000 as follows:
2-2-1 Enter MRP type X0 in the MRP1 view.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

2-3 Create an integration model to transfer the material master to APO:
2-3-1 Generate an integration model with the following settings:
Model name: PUMP##
Target system: Logical APO system name that you noted above
(APOCLNT800)
Application: MAT T-F1##
Select Data Type material masters then scroll down to Relevant Materials
area and enter T-F1## and Plant 1000 to be included in the integration
model.

Do not execute the integration model yet!

2-3-2 Save your settings as variant MAT T-F1##.
2-3-3 Execute the integration model by pressing the execute icon. On the
following results screen, make sure that the integration model selected your
material T-F1##.
2-3-4 To complete this process Save your integration model.

To transfer the master data to the APO System, you must activate
the integration model.
2-4 Activate your integration model.
2-5 Check the result of the material master transfers in APO. In the APO System,
display the product T-F1## in location 1000.
2-5-1 What is the name of product T-F1##?
______________________________________________
2-5-2 Look at the Administration tab page. Which user created the product
master?
____________________
Where does this user come from?
____________________________________________________
2-5-3 Go to the Procurement tab page. Which procurement type is set?
____________________________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: APO Integration
1-1 Document the RFC connection:
1-1-1 R/3 client: Varied, for example, client 800.
1-1-2 Menu path in Customizing of the R/3 System:
Basis Components Application Link Enabling (ALE) Sending and
Receiving Systems Logical Systems Assign Client to Logical System
Select the table entry corresponding to your client.
Select the Details button.
Assigned logical name of the R/3 System: Varied, for example,
T90CLNT090.
Back out to Main Menu
1-1-3 APO client: Varied, for example, client 800.
1-1-4 Menu path in Customizing of the APO System:
R/3 Basis Customizing Application Link Enabling (ALE) Sending
and Receiving Systems Logical Systems Assign Client to Logical
System
Select the table entry corresponding to your client.
Select the Details button.
Assigned logical name of the APO System: Varied, for example,
APOCLNT800.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-2 Document the RFC connection to the APO system:
1-2-1 RFC connection to the APO System: Menu path in the R/3 System:
Tools Administration Administration Network RFC
Destinations (Select R/3 Connections) Select APOCLNT800 by double-
clicking.
User name: USERADMIN
1-2-2 RFC connection to the R/3 System: Menu path in the APO System:
Tools Administration Administration Network RFC
Destinations (Select R/3 Connections) Select T90CLNT090 by double-
clicking.
User name: USERADMIN
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: APO Master Data
2-1 Menu path in R/3 Customizing:
Production Material Requirements Planning Master Data Check MRP Types
2-1-1 MRP procedure in MRP type X0: X, External planning
2-1-2 Effect: This MRP type means that the corresponding materials will not be
planned in the R/3. For planned orders that are created manually or
transferred from a non-SAP system (APO), a BOM explosion is still
performed.
2-1-3 Planning method: 1, Planned with a non-SAP system
2-2 Menu path in the R/3 System:
Logistics Production Master Data Material Master Material Change
Immediately
2-3
2-3-1 Menu path in the R/3 System:
Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning Interface
Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer Integration Model
Generate Create
2-3-2 Save as a variant: Enter the variant name in the integration model under
Goto Variant Save as variant and then Save.
2-3-3 Choose Execute. On the resulting screen, double-click on the word Material
that appears under the Filter Object heading. Verify that your material has
been selected in the model.
Choose Save. You should get a message confirming that the Integration
Model was generated.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

2-4 Activate your model:
Menu path in the R/3 System:
Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning Interface Core Interface
Advanced Planner and Optimizer Integration Model Generate Activate
Verify that your Model, Logical System, and APO Application code is correct on the
activation screen.
Choose Execute.
On the resulting screen, put your cursor on the line containing the date, time and
your user-id by clicking on it one time.
Choose the Active/Inactive button. A green check mark should appear on the line.
Choose the Start button. You should get a message confirming the activation.
2-5 Menu path in the APO System: Master Data Product, enter product T-F1##,
select Location view and enter location 1000, then press the Display button
2-5-1 Name of product: The name is Pump PRECISION 100 (transferred from
the R/3 System).
2-5-2 User who created the product master: The product master was created by
user USERADMIN.
Origin of this user: The product master was transferred via the CIF interface
that is based on a RFC connection between the R/3 and the APO System.
The user USERADMIN is defined in this RFC connection the CIF
interface uses this user to logon to the APO System.
2-5-3 Procurement type: Procurement type E (In-house production) is set.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! APO TP/VS-related Master Data
! Result of transfer of R/3 Master Data into APO
! Supplementing APO Master Data
APO TP/VS Master Data
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the result of the transfer of R/3 TP/VS
relevant Master Data into APO
! Explain the function of the individual Master
Data Documents in APO
! Specify where in the APO System it may be
necessary to add to the Master Data
transferred from the R/3 System
APO TP/VS Master Data: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! In preparation for transportation planning using the
APO TP/VS component, master data must be
transferred to the APO system using the CIF.
! The PC electronics manufacturer must set up one
or more integration models to transfer TP/VS
relevant master data to APO.
APO TP/VS Master Data: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Vehicle Scheduling Process Flow (1)
Carrier Selection
Carrier Tendering Release Shipments
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Backorder Processing
Master Data Modeling
Optimization
(Load Consolidation &
Vehicle Scheduling)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Master Data: Overview (1)
R/3
APO
R/3 master data
APO master data
Plant
Customer
Vendor/Carrier
Location
Product
Location
Material master

" The system transfers the R/3 master data objects plant, customer, and vendor into APO as locations
with different location types.
" The system also transfers classes and characteristics from the R/3 into the APO System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Location Types
R/3
APO
Locations with
location type
Plant
1001 Production plant
Distribution center
1002 Distribution center
MRP area
1007 MRP area
Customer
1010 Customer
Transportation zone
1005 Transportation zone
CIF
Vendor
1011 Supplier
1020 Carrier
1006 Stock Transfer Point

" When master data is transferred to APO, the corresponding Location Type is assigned to each master
record.
" The transportation zone in the Customer Master record updates the APO transportation zone table, if
an entry does not already exist in the table for the transportation zone.
" The R/3 Vendor Master does not contain a transportation zone; therefore, the transportation zones
used with Suppliers/Carriers must be set up manually in the APO Transportation Zone table.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Location Type: Plant
Plant
Name
Customizing: Plant
Street Alsterstr. 13
Town 22222 Hamburg
Country DE
Region 02
Time zone CET
Language German
Plant Hamburg
1000
Master data: Location
Plant Hamburg 1000
Loc.type Production plant 1001
Alsterstr. 13
Town 22222 Hamburg
DE
02
Germany
Hamburg
Time zone CET
Language German
General Address
Data transfer from the R/3 plant
Location
Street
Country
Region
Germany
Hamburg
APO

" The system transfers a plant into the APO System as a location with location type 1001 (production
plant). The system also copies these basic settings for the plant: description, address data, time zone,
and regional assignment.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Additional Data in APO Location
1000
Loc.type Production plant 1001
Alsterstr. 13
Town 22222 Hamburg
DE
02
Germany
Hamburg
Time zone CET
Language German
General Address
Location
Street
Country
Region
Plant Hamburg
Plant Hamburg
DE
EN
Short description of the
location in several
languages
APO-specific planning
parameters
... TP/VS
APO

" For APO locations, you can maintain the short text in several languages (in contrast with the plant in
R/3, for example), so that after logon in a certain language, this language appears.
" As a rule, APO locations contain many additional planning parameters that have no equivalents in
the R/3 System. You can then maintain these parameters in APO. The system cannot transfer them
from the R/3 System.
" Enhanced For Transportation Specific Data:
$ Address/Postal Code Information
$ Reference Tables for Specifying Compatible/Incompatible Transportation Resources
$ Lead-Time Buffers (Picking/Packing, Document Creation, and so on)
$ Loading/Unloading Resources for Inbound/Outbound Shipping
$ Location Availability/Dock Hours
$ Transportation Zone Relationship
" In order to get distance and time proposals, you should maintain the coordinates of a location.
" The TP/VS tab specifies for each location:
$ If the transportation types must match (incompatible/compatible transportation type)
$ If a load is for one customer only, or if another customer order can be included in the load
$ Time needed for commission
$ Time needed to prepare the transportation
$ First or last point to be delivered
" For capacity restrictions under Resources tab, define the resources used for loading and unloading a
vehicle, or the opening hours of the resource of this location, or whether no resources are needed for
loading and unloading.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Location Type: Distribution Center
Plant
Name
Customizing: Plant
Street Via Castaldi 1
Town 20100 Milano
Country IT
DC Milano
2400
DC Milano 2400
Loc.type Distribution center 1002
Via Castaldi 1
Town 20100 Milano
IT Italy
General Address
Data transfer from R/3 distribution center (from Rel. 4.0)
Location
Street
Country
Italy
...
...
Definition as DC
Customizing: DRP
Plant Node type Name
1000 Hamburg plant
DC 2400 DC Milano
APO

" As of Release 4.0, the R/3 System can define plants as distribution centers, within the frames of the
DRP functionality (DRP: Distribution Resource Planning) in the R/3 System. For this, you use the
corresponding entry in the Customizing table (Customizing step Assign Node Type - Maintain Plant
in the settings of DRP Customizing).
" When you transfer plants into APO that are defined in the R/3 System as distribution centers, the
system transfers them to location type 1002 (distribution center). The transfer of the individual R/3
plant settings (in R/3, a DC is a plant) takes place in exactly the same way as it does for production
plants.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Location Type: Customer
Customer
Name
Master data: Customer
Street Calvinstr. 36
Town 13467 Berlin
Country
DE
Region
11
Language German
Becker Berlin
1000
Becker Berlin 1000
Loc.type Customer 1010
Calvinstr. 36
Town 13467 Berlin
DE
11
Germany
Berlin
Language German
General Address
Data transfer from the R/3 customer
Location
Street
Country
Region
Germany
Berlin
Transportation zone
D10000
Control data
Berlin region D10000
Loc.type Transport.zone 1005
Location
Berlin region
APO
Time zone CET

" The system transfers customers from the R/3 System as locations with type 1010 (customer).
" The system creates sales orders in the R/3 System and transfers them as transaction data into APO.
" When the system transfers a customer master from the R/3 into APO, the actual customer location is
transferred, as is the transportation zone that is assigned to a customer in the R/3 System, as location
type 1005 (transportation zone). You then enter the missing data for use with this transportation zone
in the APO planning. You also need a transportation relevant hierarchy.
" You can maintain the hierarchy in two ways:
$ Implement it manually in APO by attaching the relevant locations in the APO system to the
hierarchy
$ Assign the customers in the R/3 System to a transportation zone and transfer the customers to
APO. The transportation zones are then created automatically in APO and the corresponding
hierarchy entries are created.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Location Type: Vendor/Carrier/Service Provider
Vendor
Name
Master data: Vendor
Street Kolpingstr. 1
Town 12001 Berlin
Country
DE
Region
11
Language German
C.E.B. Berlin
L1000
C.E.B. Berlin L1000
Loc.type Vendor 1011
Kolpingstr. 1
Town 12001 Berlin
DE
11
Germany
Berlin
Language German
General Address
Data transfer from the R/3 vendor
Location
Street
Country
Region
Germany
Berlin
APO

" The system transfers vendors from the R/3 System as locations with type 1011 (vendor).
" Note: If the vendor and the customer have the same number in the R/3 System (for example,
customer and vendor 1000), then you must rename one of them in the APO inbox, using the
customer exit for the vendor master (for example, rename the vendor in S1000). Otherwise, you
cannot distinguish between the two locations.
" The vendor must be known in APO in order for the vendor selection to take place in APO.
" In the R/3 System, you must specify which account groups from the R/3 vendor master becomes the
carrier in the APO System.
$ To do this, choose the CIFVENTYPE table in the data browser (transaction SE16) and confirm
with Enter. Branch to the corresponding selection screen.
$ You can use the input help to choose an account group for the R/3 System and a location type for
the APO System so that data can be transferred between these two systems.
" Account group 0005 (carrier) appears as a fixed value, however, you can define other account groups
in R/3 Customizing. For the location type on the APO side, the carrier (1020) or supplier (1011)
appear.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
External Procurement Relationship
Vendor
Material
Purch. info record
Valid from 01.01.2000
R-1150
L1000
Ext. procurement relationship
L1000
Product R-1150
Data transfer from the R/3 purchasing info record
Source loc.
Plant 1000
1000 Target loc.
to 31.12.9999
Valid from 01.01.2000
to 31.12.9999
General Data
Settings
Info rec.
Info rec. 53004711
R3CLNT800
53004711
Transportation lanes
Valid 01.01.2000 to 31.12.9999
Vendor
known
in APO?
APO

" The system can transfer a purchasing info record from the R/3 into APO as an external procurement
relationship. You should be aware that the source location (that corresponds with the vendor in the
purchasing info record) must be recognized in APO in order for a successful data transfer to take
place. If necessary, the system will transfer the vendor beforehand.
" The system transfers the purchasing price from the purchasing info record into the external
procurement relationship (scale prices, too).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Master Data: Overview (2)
R/3
APO
R/3 master data
APO master data
Plant
Customer
Vendor
Location
Product
Resource
Location
Material master

" The system will transfer the R/3 material master into the APO System as a product master.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Product Master in APO
Views of the APO product master
Administration
Attributes
Units of measure
Classification
SNP1
ATP
Demand
Lot size
SNP2
PP/DS
Procurement
GR/GI
Material

" The product master in APO is divided into different views according to topic. The header data (tab
pages characteristics, units of measure,and classification) is general and valid for more than one
location.
" You can specify the planning of a product in APO according to the location. Locations can come
from plant type or MRP area (according to the R/3 storage location MRP areas).
" Many of the fields for the product are automatically filled when the system transfers a material
master from the R/3 System. To guarantee the consistency of the data in the R/3 and APO Systems,
only maintain these fields in the R/3 System. The system then only changes the data during a transfer
(from the R/3) of the master data changes.
" You can define the length of the APO product master number in APO Customizing (process step:
Determine Output Display Of Product Number). As is standard in R/3, an 18 digit product number is
used.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SNP 1
Administration
PP/DS
Location Data
Views
Location Data
Views
Lot Size
Demand
SNP 2
GR/GI
ATP
Units of measure
Attributes
Classification
Procurement
Extra
Global Data
Views
Global Data
Views
Transportation Group
Used to Group Products According
to Vehicle Type (For example,
Products Requiring Refrigeration)
=
Product Master Data
*
*
*
*
*
*

" The Transportation Group is entered in the General Data section under the Attributes tab.
" The Loading Group is a key that identifies the equipment required to load the goods. For example, a
crane or fork lift truck. The Loading Group is entered in the Shipping Section under the GR/GI tab.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
General Data
R/3
Mat A
Product A
Attributes
001 Material group
0001 Transportation grp
280 KG Gross weight
0,75 M3 Volume
Units of measure
1 pc equals 1 pc
1 pal equals 10 pc
Regarding classes and
characteristics that must exist
in APO
Classification
MRP type X0
MRP procedure X
Without materials
planning,with BOM
explosion
X0
Simple selection
in the integration
model
APO

" The system transfers the following general data from the R/3 System material master into the APO
product: Material group (Basic data 1), transportation group (Sales and Distribution: gen./Plant),
gross weight and volume (Basic data 1), units of measure (Additional data), and classification data
(Classification). Note that, for classification data, the system transfers the classes and characteristics
into APO beforehand.
" Materials that the system transfers into APO must be part of the integration model. The selection of
APO-relevant materials can usually be easily defined by the use of MRP type X0. In the integration
model Create screen this field is labeled MRP characteristic.
" Materials can also be selected by any combination of the following fields: Material Number, Plant,
Material Type, MRP Controller, ABC Indicator, and Plant-specific Material Status.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Maintaining Additional Product Master Fields in APO
! Mass maintenance for product master fields in
APO (for those that cannot be transferred from the
R/3 System)
! Alternative solution using modification:
Enhancement of the R/3 material master record
with customer-specific fields (Append structures)
and transfer of these fields in the integration
model (using a customer exit)

" Use mass maintenance to subsequently maintain product master records that you have copied from
R/3 (call from the initial screen in product master maintenance). In mass maintenance, for example,
you can maintain fields that are not transferred from R/3, because these fields do not exist.
" Alternative solution using modification: You can extend the R/3 material master using customer-
specific fields (Append structures, see SAP note 44410).
" You can also enhance the R/3 material master, to maintain the settings for functions that do not exist
in R/3 in the R/3 material master. For the CIF transfer for these fields, you need to note that you need
to enhance CIF in the R/3 outbox and the APO inbox to define that these fields are transferred
(customer exits for material masters).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Vehicle Resource (T) Transport (T)
Calendar Handling Unit (H)
Resources

" Transportation planning relevant resources are Transport (T), Vehicle Resource (T), Calendar, and
Handling Resource (H).
" Transport resources are only used by SNP.
" The resource category (T, H) determines the usage of a resource. They are for descriptive purposes
only and do not play a role in planning.
" TP/VS resources are created manually.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Single or multi-resources
" Capacity for loading/unloading
! Vehicle resources
" Capacity of a specific transportation type
! Calendar
" Specification of working days
Transportation Planning Resources

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Single or multi-resources
" Capacity for loading/unloading
Single Resource Example

" A single resource upon which only one activity can be executed at a time has a dimension-free
capacity of one. For single resources the capacity value is fixed in the system. A single resource can
have only two different situations; either it is loaded with an activity or it is not loaded at all.
" Multi resources are used to map resources on which several activities can be carried out at a time.
The maximum number of activities that can be scheduled at the same time depends on the
organizational or technical conditions for the resource.
" Path: SAP menuMaster DataResource
" A Handling Resource (Resource Type H) is an example of a single or multi-resource that is used in
TP/VS.
" Loading and unloading equipment such as fork-lifts are examples of this type of resource.
" Capacities in the form of available working hours including downtimes are specified for the handling
resource.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Vehicle resources
" Capacity of a specific transportation method
Vehicle Resource Example)

" Vehicle Resource (TP/VS)
$ Individual or Single Capacity (by weight/volume)
$ A full load equals the maximum capacity of the resource
" The vehicle resource is a multidimensional resource. It can have six dimensions in maximum.
" The available capacity of this resource type cannot be maintained on a time-dependent basis. If you
do need to maintain limited availability, you can do so by means of shift sequences.
" Key Consideration:
$ During Optimization, resources are considered according to Type/Method and Independent of a
Carrier
" Solution for Aligning with Carrier Capabilities and Geographical Coverage
$ For Identical Resources, Create Multiple Vehicle Types/Methods in accordance with Carriers
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Transport Method
" Basis for a Group of Resources
" Created in IMG
Transport Method

" Path: IMG Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Supply Chain Engineer (SCE)
Maintain Transport Method
" The first column (labeled Vehicle), is also called the Transportation Method. The transportation
method describes the vehicle used for shipments between locations.
" If you set the flag Own means of transport the following applies to vehicles of the means of transport
in the optimization :
$ You start at the beginning of the optimization run with the last location
$ On completion of the route planned by the optimizer, you must return to the depot location
provided that a depot location is maintained (resource master data).
$ In particular there must be a transport link from the last unloading location back to the depot.
Otherwise, the optimizer cannot carry out these return journeys, and no transport is generated.
$ The entire vehicle route generated by the optimizer generates a single transport.
Example: you want to transport two orders from A to B using one vehicle; every order fills the
vehicle. The vehicle is assigned to the depot location A. The optimizer plans a route A-B A-
B A. The transport includes the sections A-B A-B. With a third-party means of transport you
would get two transports, A-B in each case.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Lane
Plant
Distr.Center
Customer
Transportation Lanes
Customer

" A transportation lane represents a direct route between two locations that can be used to source and
transport products. Each lane is defined by its source and target locations, depending on the
direction and its assigned products to be transported along the lane. Each lane is also assigned
available transportation methods.
" Transportation lanes can be maintained individually or in groups. Mass maintenance of
transportation lanes facilitate the generation and maintenance of large quantities of transportation
supply chain data.
" The supply chain network is represented by the locations and their connected transportation lanes.
" Considered part of APO master data, transportation lanes usually remain unchanged over an
extended period of time.
" The following APO components make use of transportation lanes:
$ Supply Network Planning
$ Network Design
$ Production Planning
$ TP/VS
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Information Assigned to a Lane:
! Source and target location
! Product procurement
" Choice of products assigned to lane
" Validity
% Date from
% Date to
! Carriers
" Location
" Transportation costs
" Share of business
" Priority

" The information in the tab Product Procurement is not used in VS.
" There is a mass create function for creating transportation lanes.
" A carrier will be assigned in a lane under the transport type Allocate carrier. The carrier has to be
defined as a location (location type 1020). To do this, an additional tab Carrier is available.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Transportation Method
" Choice of transportation method
" Validity
% Date from
% Date to
" Parameters used in VS
% Transport time (in hours, minutes)
% Transport distance
% Transportation costs
for a unit of product
% Cost for transportation method
(per km)

" Controls:
$ Check the box for Det. Planning is ON
$ If you want to use SNP, check Aggr. Planning
$ Discrete transportation method is used in SNP
" The system proposes time and distance of transportation based on the coordinates of the locations.
" You can maintain real data and set the flag for Fixed Transport Duration and Fixed Transport
Distance.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Master Transportation Lanes
Runtime Lane
Inbound
Outbound
Replenishment
TP/VS Supply Chain Modeling - Hierarchies
Transportation
Zone
Hierarchies

" There are two types of hierarchies used in VS:
$ Transportation zone hierarchies to allocate a location to customers/plants/DCs so that they are
served via one transportation lane
$ Carrier Hierarchy structures used to create multiple modal shipments
" Transportation zone hierarchies are used to group shipping origins or destinations to reduce the
number of transportation lanes that have to be maintained.
" A transportation lane can be maintained between:
$ A location and a transportation zone
$ Two transportation zones
$ A transportation zone
" You can maintain the hierarchy in two ways:
$ Implement it manually in APO by attaching the relevant locations in the APO system to the
hierarchy (transportation zones as level 1 node, customers as subordinated level 2 node)
$ Assign the customers in R/3 to a transportation zone and transfer the customers to APO: the
transportation zones are then created automatically in APO and the corresponding hierarchy
entries are created.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Runtime Lane Geo Distance 80
Maintained Master Lane Distance 130
Master Lane Geo Distance 100
Runtime Lane Distance 104
Distance/Duration Calculation
Runtime Geo Distance 80 X
=
Actual Runtime Distance 104
Maint. Master Lane 130
Master Geo Distance 100
Distance Calculation
Distance / Average Speed Per Unit
Duration Calculation

" TP/VS will compute the runtime lanes during optimization. Corresponding transportation lanes are
generated between all locations assigned to the transportation zones. In the process, the cost
information is taken from the transportation lanes maintained. The distance/duration is calculated
according to the settings or taken from the transportation lane maintained.
" The maintained distance in the Master Lane includes a factor for road/street map variability. The
Factor is obtained from the Maintain Transport Method table in Customizing. This factor establishes
the proportion between the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by
the vehicle transporting goods between them.
" Included in the Maintain Transport Method table is the Average Speed of the transport method. The
Runtime distance is divided by the average speed to calculate the estimated Duration.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Zone Hierarchies are assigned to
the SC Model and displayed in the Work Area
Transportation Zone (Location) Hierarchy

" To set up a hierarchy:
$ Create a hierarchy in Customizing
$ Specify these hierarchies in the TP/VSBasic Settings Maintain Transportation-Relevant
Hierarchy table in Customizing of APO.
$ Define the hierarchy application-wise in master data (get the transportation zone via CIF from R/3)
$ Assign the hierarchy to the active model in SCE if not from CIF. To see it in SCE, set the Display
hierarchies option in the SCE User-specific settings at menu path: SAP MenuMaster
DataSupply Chain EngineerMake Settings.
" Note: A Circular relationship must be set up for creating intra-zone connections. To do this, create a
transportation lane with the source and target locations as the same transportation zone (= Intra-zone
Lane).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Structure Hierarchy

" TP/VS offers a trans-shipment function in conjunction with shipping using multiple modes of
transportation or the transfer of orders between vehicles. Trans-shipments are shipments for which
one or several orders must be transferred from one vehicle to another at some stage between the start
and destination locations of the order(s). This may involve vehicles of different types with different
modes.
" Shipments of this kind can only be generated using the Optimizer. It is not possible to create them
manually using interactive planning.
" The following data must be maintained so that the Optimizer can generate the shipments required:
$ Create a two-level location hierarchy structure in Customizing
$ In Customizing, enter this structure as the hierarchy structure for the transportation service
provider (transshipment structure). For this, choose TP/VS Basic Settings Maintain
Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy
$ Create a hierarchy for this structure
$ Assign the hierarchy to model 000
$ Maintain the hierarchy
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Hierarchy: Example 1
Structure of a hierarchy with one
stock transfer point
Plant DC
Customers

" Hierarchies can be maintained and displayed at: SAP Menu: Master Data Hierarchy
" In this scenario, the DC represents a load transfer/consolidation point or cross-docking location.
" For example, several orders are transported from a plant by truck to a DC and then they are
distributed to several customers using smaller trucks.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Hierarchy: Example 2
Structure of a hierarchy with two
stock transfer points, multiple modes of transportation
Truck Truck
Rail
Plant
DC1 DC2
Customer

" In this example, a customer shipment is made using multiple modes of transportation, Truck and
Rail. The DCs represent load transfer points, such as rail yards and ports.
" Between a plant/DC and a customer (Outbound shipments) or Vendor and Plant/DC (Inbound
shipments) there cannot be more than two stock transfer points.
" If stock transfer points are used, there can be one alternative direct lane between a plant/DC and
customer for outbound shipments or vendor and plant/DC for inbound shipments. Which lane is
chosen depends on the maintained costs per lane.
" A transfer transport generated by the optimizer can be edited manually. The times can be changed
and orders can be taken from the transport. It is not possible to add orders to the transport manually.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: Roundtrip outbound from one location
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Deliver
Pickup
One source,
multiple destinations
source-destination
vehicles trip
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Deliver
Pickup
One source,
multiple destinations
source-destination
vehicles trip

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: Round trip inbound into one location
One destination,
multiple sources
One destination,
multiple sources
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Pickup
source-destination
vehicles trip
Deliver
-destination
vehicles trip

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: Mixed round trip to and from one
location
! Note:
You can create mixed
inbound and outbound in
APO, but R/3 can not process
these shipments
One location as source or
destinations for all other
locations
One location as source or
destinations for all other
locations
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Deliver
Pickup
source -destination
vehicles trip
Deliver
Pickup
-
vehicles trip

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: Multi stop - no return
Orders with different
sources and destinations
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Deliver
Pickup
source-destination
vehicles trip
Deliver
Pickup
-

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: Scheduled vehicles
! Note:
Opening hours of
locations are not
considered when using
scheduled resources
8:00 am
01:00 pm
10:00 am
03:00 pm
1:00 pm
06:00 pm
2:00 pm
07:00 pm
3:00 am
08:00 pm
5:00 am
10:00 pm
arrival time =
departure time
For example, trains, ships
8:00 am
01:00 pm
8:00 am
01:00 pm
10:00 am
03:00 pm
10:00 am
03:00 pm
1:00 pm
06:00 pm
1:00 pm
06:00 pm
2:00 pm
07:00 pm
2:00 pm
07:00 pm
3:00 am
08:00 pm
station
3:00 am
08:00 pm
5:00 am
10:00 pm
5:00 am
10:00 pm
arrival time =
departure time
Depot
(as a warehouse)
Deliver
Pickup
source-destination
vehicles trip
-destination
vehicles trip

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Note: More complex problems ...can be solved by
decomposing the transport network
... can be solved by decomposing the transport network
S1
S2
S3
S4
IDC ODC
C1
C2
C3
C4
Supplier Inbound
DC
Outbound
DC
Customer
Assignments:
S1 - IDC
S2 - IDC
Assignments:
ODC - C1
ODC - C2
Decompose:
1) Optimize pick up as a totally
separate problem.
2) Source is now no longer S1
but IDC.
3) Establish lane between IDC
and C1.
4) Have the optimizer ship
either:
IDC - ODC - C1, or:
IDC - C1
Note:
This only works if the ship from
and ship to addresses are
changed appropriately
Assignment:
IDC - ODC

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the result of the transfer of R/3 TP/VS
relevant Master Data into APO
! Explain the function of the individual Master
Data Documents in APO
! Specify where in the APO System it may be
necessary to add to the Master Data transferred
from the R/3 System
APO TP/VS Master Data: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: APO TP/VS master Data
Topic: Master Data Integration Model

Create, generate and activate an R/3 Integration Model to
transfer, via the CIF, the master data needed in the TP/VS
component of the APO system.
Check the master data transfer settings in the R/3 System
Create transportation lanes in APO Master data.
Display APO master data

Before setting up the optimization and planning environment in
TP/VS, the pertinent master ond organizational data must exist in
APO. Most of this master data will come from the R/3 (OLTP)
System. Relevant Customer, Vendor/Carrier, and Material master
data must be transferred and maintained via the CIF. In addition,
organizational data such as Plants and Transportation Planning
Points must be transferred also. As a member of the TP/VS
implementation team, it is your job to set up the integration
model to perform this initial transfer and any subsequent transfer
that will be required.
1-1 Create, generate, and activate an integration model, GR##, in R/3 to transfer the
following master and organizational data to the target APO system:
Material masters
Plants
Customers
Vendors
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-1-1 Create the integration model: GR##.
Use MD as your Application code.
Restrict your master data selection to that data that belongs to your group
number. Use the following table as a basis for creating your model:

Master Data Object Data to Select
Material master records T-ATC1-##
T-ATD2-##
T-ATD3-##
Customer master records T-S11A##
T-S22A##
T-S33A##
T-S11B##
T-S11C##
T-S090##
T-S200##
Vendor Master records T-S100##
T-S11F##
T-S11H##
Shipments* TPPt: AP##
*Note: You must select Shipments to get your Transportation Planning
Points transferred to APO.
Restrict Selection of Material Master records to the following plants:
10##, 12##, 22##, 25##
Save the settings as a variant: GR##-MD
1-1-2 Generate the model.
1-1-3 Activate the model.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-2 In the APO system, using the master data displays, verify that the following master
data was transferred:
Location Master Data:
T-S11A##: What is the Transportation Zone:
_______________________________
T-S11C##: What is the Transportation Zone:
_______________________________
T-S11F##: What is the Transportation Zone:
_______________________________
Product Master Data:
T-ATC1-##:
What is the Transportation Group? _________
What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________
What is the Volume?: ___________________
T-ATD2-##:
What is the Transportation Group? _________
What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________
What is the Volume?: ___________________
1-3 Now that you have locations in APO master data, you will establish some
transportation lanes between your plant 10## and your Customers. The remaining
lanes will be created in a later unit. Create the lanes within Model 000. Set the
Product Procurement area to All Products. Put Group ## in the Header Description.
1-3-1 Create transportation lanes between Plant 10## and customers
T-S11A##, T-S22A##, T-S33A##, T-S11B## and T-S11C##. Remember,
you should also create a transportation lane going from the customer to the
plant/DC.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-4 Check the settings for the transfer of master data from the R/3 System to APO using
transaction CFC5. Just document them. DO NOT CHANGE THEM.
1-4-1 Material Master:
___ Bus.Transaction Event, Immed.
___ ALE change pointer, periodic
___ No change transfer
1-4-2 Customers:
___ No change transfer
1-4-3 Vendors:
___ No change transfer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Unit: APO TP/VS master Data
Topic: Master Data Integration Model
1-1 Create, Generate, and Activate your Master Data Integration Model:
1-1-1 Create the integration model:
R/3 SAP Standard Menu: Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain
Planning Interface Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer
Integration Model Generate Create
Enter Model Name: GR##
Enter Target System: your APO logical system
Enter Application: MD
In the Add to integration model check boxes, set the following:
Material masters
Plants
Customers
Vendors
Shipments
In the Relevant Materials selection box, enter your material numbers by first
selecting Multple selection on the Material line.
In the Single vals tab enter your material numbers.
Choose Copy.
In the Plants line, choose Multiple selection and enter the plants for which to
copy the material masters in the Single vals tab.
Choose Copy.
In the Customers selection box, enter your Customer numbers using the
same method as that used in Material Master selection.
In the Vendors selection box, enter your Vendor numbers using the same
method as that used for the Material and Customer selection.
In the Shipments selection box, enter your Transportation Planning Point in
the first field.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Before the model is generated, create a Variant of the model. This variant is
necessary if you want to run the model in a background process later.
Choose Save.
In the ABAP Variant screen, enter your variant name: GR##-MD and a
description of your own choosing.
Choose Save.
Choose the Execute icon.
Upon completion of the model generation you will get a message indicating
the model was generated.
1-1-3 Activate the Model.
Integration Model Generate Activate
Enter your Model, Logical System and APO Application code if not present
in the fields.
Choose Execute.
Place your cursor on the line with the Date, Time and User-ID.
Select the Active/Inactive button.
A green check mark should appear next to the line indicating that the model
has been made active.
Select Start to actually transfer data to the APO system.
After the transfer has been activated, you will get a confirmation message.
1-2 Verify the Location data:
APO: SAP Menu: Master Location Location
Enter the Location Number in the Location field and select Display.
For the Transportation Zone code, Select the TP/VS tab.
Verify the Product Master data:
APO: SAP Menu: Master Product
Enter the Material Number in the Product field .
Set the View to Global Data.
Select Display.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-3 Create the Transportation Lanes.
APO: SAP Menu: Master Transportation Lanes
1-3-1 Create Plant/DC to Customer Lanes.
Model Name: 000
Source loc.: 10##
Target loc.: Customer location number
Choose Create.
Choose Header data.
Enter Group ## in the Description field.
Choose Copy and Close (green check mark).
In the Product Procurement section, select Creation of a new entry.
In the Product Procurement box that is displayed on the right side of the
screen, select the All Products.
Enter today's date in the Start date field in the Validity box.
Enter '12/31/9999' in the End date field in the Validity box.
Choose Copy and Close.
Choose Save.
Perform these steps for all remaining combinations of the plant and
Customer locations in the list.
1-4 Document the setting for the transfer of master data from R/3 to APO:
R/3 SAP Standard Menu: Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning
Interface Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer Settings CFC5 - Change
transfer
1-4-1 ,2, and 3 Document the setting from the screen.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Models and Planning Versions for Master Data and
Transaction Data
! Maintaining Models via the Supply Chain Engineer
Models and Planning Versions
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Create Models and Planning Versions for
Master Data and Transaction Data
! Maintain Models via the Supply Chain
Engineer
Models and Planning Versions: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The PC electronics manufacturer creates multiple
models for transportation planning and each one
can have multiple versions.
Models and Planning Versions: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Models and Planning Versions
PPM
Resources
PPM
Resources
Master data
Master data in APO
Active model 000
Locations
Simulation
model Z01
Non Non- -
R/3
Planning version 1
Version-dependent master
data and transaction data
Planning version 1
Simulation
model n
PPM
Transportation
lane
Resources
Active planning version 000
Planning version n
Planning version n
Planning version n+1
Planning version n+1
Products

" The Supply Chain Model (abbreviated as model) represents the entire supply chain network, ranging
from suppliers over production and distribution sites up to the customer. It includes locations,
transportation lanes, products, resources, and Production Process Models (PPM). Thus, the model is
the basis for all planning functions in APO. It contains only master data and it is modeled in the
Supply Chain Engineer.
" Master data from the R/3 System (or a non-R/3 System) is automatically assigned to the active APO
model (model 000) during the master data transfer to the APO System. The active model represents
the supply chain actually used in the enterprise. In this way, all master data transferred is
automatically available for operational planning in the APO model 000. Master data that you create
manually in APO must be explicitly assigned to one model.
" If you want to plan another supply chain (for example, a different distribution center) in the
simulation, you can create an inactive model in APO. If you want to use certain master data in both
the active and inactive model, or in the inactive model alone, you must assign this master data to the
inactive model. You can either use the Supply Chain Engineer (SCE) as the modeling tool in APO or
a manual assignment from within master data maintenance (from the R/3-APO interface, master data
is automatically assigned to the active model only).
" For simulation purposes, you can create several planning versions for a given supply chain model.
Note that only model 000 and planning version 000 are active. The planning version comprises
master data and transaction data. In an inactive planning version, you can, for example, simulate
increased planned independent requirements and plan production based on an increased demand.
You cannot transfer the planning results from the inactive planning version to the active version. You
must repeat the planning in the active planning version.
" You can use version management to copy models and planning versions or create them manually.
Their names must be unique, which means that there cannot be two planning versions of the same
name in different models. The active planning version 000 only exists in model 000.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Models and Planning Versions for Locations and
Products
R/3
APO
R/3 Master Data APO Master Data
Locations
Products
Active model 000
Planning version 001
Locations
Products
Reference
Planning
version-specific
fields may be
added
(only valid in
version 001)
Reference
Simulation model Z01
Plant,
customer, vendor
Material master
Assignment
Create
master data
Maintained during master data
transfer
Master data added

" If locations and products are created in APO via the R/3-APO interface, they are automatically
created in the active planning version 000 and assigned to the active model 000.
" If planning is simulated in an inactive planning version (for example, planning version 001), the
master data fields of the location and the product master of the active planning version 000 are read
(location and product in an inactive planning version thus refer to the active planning version 000).
" If you want to use modified master data in simulated planning (for example, different MRP attributes
of a product), you can maintain certain fields specifically for the planning version in the location or
the product master in APO (manually or mass maintenance). During planning in planning version
001, these version-specific fields from planning version 001 are then read. For fields that are specific
to a planning version, and can be maintained as such, the system reads the fields from active
planning version 000 (reference) if no alternative settings have been made.
" If you want to use certain locations and products in inactive models, you must manually assign these
locations and products to the inactive model required. You can do so from within master data
maintenance or via the Supply Chain Engineer. Within the inactive model, planning can be carried
out in one or several inactive planning versions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Independent of planning
version
Independent of planning
version
Models and Planning Versions for Resources
R/3
APO
R/3 Master Data APO Master Data
Resource
Active model 000
Copy
Planning
version-specific
fields may be
added
(only valid in
version 001)
Copy
Simulation model Z01
Capacity
Assignment
Create
master data
Maintained during master data
transfer
Master data added
Resource
Resource

" If resources are created in APO via the R/3-APO interface, they are automatically created in a
planning version-independent version 000 (planning version blank) and assigned to the active model
000. In addition, these planning version-independent resources are automatically copied into all
planning versions (active planning version 000 as well as all inactive planning versions) that exist in
this model during master data transfer. You are left with a planning version independent resource, an
active planning version resource, and inactive planning version resources.
" When version management is used to create a new planning version at a later stage, all resources are
automatically copied to the new planning version (as a copy of the planning version-independent
resource) when the new version is created.
" If planning is simulated in a certain planning version (for example, in the active planning version 000
or the inactive planning version 001), the resource master data fields in the relevant planning version
are read. If you want to use modified master data in the simulated planning (for example, different
operating times of resources in simulation), you can change the resources specifically for a planning
version in APO.
" If you also want to use certain resources in inactive models, you must manually assign these
resources to the required inactive model. You can do so from within master data maintenance or via
the Supply Chain Engineer. When you assign the resource to the inactive model, the resource is
automatically created in all planning versions of the inactive model (copy of the planning version-
independent resources to the planning version-specific resources of the active model).
" If you do not work in the active model and version (000) and you use TP/VS, only consolidation
is possible. Carrier Selection and Publication of Orders and Deliveries are not possible.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Supply Chain Engineer (SCE) as the Modeling Tool
for Models
Network structure
Network structure
Network map
Network map
Planning
objects
Planning
objects
Work
area
folder
Work
area
folder

" Maintain the supply chain network in the Supply Chain Engineer (SCE), by placing locations on
the map and create a network by adding transportation lanes. The lane direction shows the direction
of the product transportation flow.
" The SCE enables you to look at the data that belongs to particular elements in your supply chain. In
addition, it allows you to maintain the model objects simultaneously. You can make queries about
information via individual or combined elements in your supply chain. For example, you can query a
list of all the products belonging to a specific location in your model. At the same time, you can add
products to this location or make changes in the location master.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Locations
Transportation lanes
Objects in the Supply Chain Engineer
Carrier Carrier MRP MRP
area area
Stock transfer Stock transfer
point point
Transport Transport- -
ation ation
zone zone
Vendor Vendor Plant Plant DC DC Customer Customer

" The supply chain model also allows you to keep track of other supply chain elements, as well as
locations and transportation lanes. These include products, PPMs (production process models), and
resources.
" You may have to assign or delete large numbers of objects in your model during supply chain
modeling. Many of these objects have dependent objects assigned to them. To guarantee consistency
within the model, you can automatically assign or delete the dependent objects, together with the
primary object. Automatic assignment guarantees not only consistency but also enables easier model
maintenance.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Work Areas in the Supply Chain Engineer
! Access to frequently used objects
! Used for queries
! Serve as filters
! Configured for users

" If you have a lot of master data, viewing it in the network map in the Supply Chain Engineer can
become very confusing. To limit your view to only the master data you want to concentrate on,
define work areas. The work area is used exclusively as a filter for displaying objects in the
Engineer. You can maintain different work areas. This enables you to obtain manageable amounts of
data.
" In the work area of the Supply Chain Engineer, you can select:
$ Locations (plant, distribution center, vendor, and customer)
$ Products
$ Resources
$ Production
$ Transportation Lanes
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Create Models and Planning Versions for
Master Data and Transaction Data
! Maintain Models via the Supply Chain Engineer
Models and Planning Versions: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: Models and Planning Versions
Topic: Supply Chain Engineer

Create a model of a supply chain network.
Use the Supply Chain Engineer to view and maintain a
network.

After creating the APO Master data consisting of Locations
(plants/DC's, vendors and customers), Products, Resources and
Transportation Lanes a network can be created using the Supply
Chain Engineer. This network can be used to limit the amount of
data that is viewed for a given supply chain scenario. A Work
Area can be created for each network scenario. You will create a
work area representing your supply chain network.
1-1 Create a new Work Area, GR##, for Model 000 for your supply chain network.
1-1-1 Add the following Plants to your work area:
10## Hamburg Plant
12## Dresden Plant
22## Paris Plant
1-1-2 Add the following Distribution Center to your work area:
25## Rotterdam Distribution Center
1-1-3 Using the Connect icon on the network map, create a transportation lane
between plant 12## and plant 22##.
1-1-4 Add your customers locations to the work area:
T-S11A## CompuMax GmbH
T-S22A## PILAR am Neckar
T-S33A## DELA Handelsgesellschaft mbH
T-S11B## PC-World Stuttgart KG
T-S11C## Riedel Computer OHG
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-1-5 Add your vendors to the work area:
T-S11F## Sunny Electronics GmbH
T-S11H## PAQ Deutschland GmbH
T-S100## Intercompany Vendor for Plant 22##
1-1-6 Add your products to the work area:
T-ATC1-## Sunny Sunny 01
T-ATD2-## Maxitec R 3200 Personal computer
T-ATD3-## Diskette Drive, 3.5", HD
1-1-7 Display the list of transportation lanes for the model.
1-1-8 Save the work area.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Unit: Models and Planning Versions
Topic: Supply Chain Engineer
1-1 Create a new Work Area for Model 000 for your supply chain network:
APO SAP Menu Master Data Supply Chain Engineer /SAPAPO/SCE01 - Maintain
Model
1-1-1 Enter Model 000
Enter Work Area: GR##
Choose Change.
In the Location tab, right-click on the word Plant next to the plant icon.
Select Add objects to work area. The Select work area dialog box will
appear.
Enter the plants in the Internal char. value fields.
Choose Copy.
The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be
listed.
1-1-2 Right-click on the words Distribution Center next to the DC icon.
Select Add objects to work area. Select work area will appear.
Enter the distribution center, 25##,in the Internal char. value fields.
Choose Copy.
The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be
listed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-1-3 Create a transportation lane from plant 12## to plant 22## using the Connect
icon.
Select the Connect icon located in the toolbar above the map.
Put your cursor on the plant 12## icon and Drag&Drop a transportation lane
to plant 22##. When the left mouse button is released, the system will
display the transportation lane create screen.
Select the Header data button. When the header data General data box
appears, enter Group ## in the description field.
Choose Copy and close.
Select Create in the Product Procurement area.
When the Product Procurement box is displayed, select All Products and
enter today's date in the Start date field and 12/31/9999 (if your date format
is different, then use it) in the End date field.
Choose Copy and close.
Choose Back. The system will return you to the SCE.
1-1-4 Right-click on the words Customers/Ship-to party next to the Customer
icon.
Enter the customer location numbers in the Internal char. value fields.
Choose Copy.
The customer location icons representing your customers will appear on the
map and will be listed. In addition, lines with directional arrows will appear
representing the transportation lanes between the plants and the customers.
1-1-5 Right-click on the word Suppliers next to the Supplier location icon.
Enter the supplier location numbers in the Internal char. value fields.
Choose Copy.
The supplier location icons representing your customers will appear on the
map and will be listed. In addition, lines with directional arrows will appear
representing the transportation lanes between the plants and the suppliers.
1-1-6 To assign your products to the work area, select the Products tab first. Then
right-click on the word Products to the right of the Products icon.
Enter the product numbers in the Internal char. value fields.
Choose Copy.
Your products will appear in a list under the Products icon.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-1-7 Display the list of transportation lanes that exists in Model 000 by first
selecting the right arrowhead the the right of the tabs until the
Transportation lane tab comes into view.
Select the Transportation lane tab. The list of transportation lanes will
appear.
Find one of the transportation lanes in your network and double-click on it.
The system will take to the transportation lane change transaction.
Choose Back to return to the SCE.
1-1-8 Choose Save to save your work area.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Transfer of Transaction Data between the R/3 and
APO Systems
! Initial and Incremental Transaction Data Transfer
! Integration Model for the Transfer of Transaction
Data
! Publication of Delivery and Shipment data from the
APO to the R/3 Systems
Transfer of Transaction Data
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the process of Transaction Data
transfer between R/3 and APO Systems
! Define an Integration Model for the transfer of
Transaction data
! Make the required customizing settings in APO
to facilitate the publication of delivery and
shipment data from APO to the R/3 System
! Transfer Transaction Data from the R/3 System
to the APO System
Transfer of Transaction Data: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Sales orders, purchase orders and stock transport
orders must be transferred to APO using the CIF
for transportation planning. An integration model
will be created to transfer the transaction data to
APO.
! Upon completion of the transportation planning for
a group of sales orders, the resulting delivery and
shipment documents must be transferred to the
R/3 System using the publication process. Before
this process can be performed, customizing
settings in APO must be completed.
Transfer of Transaction Data: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transaction Data Interface: Core Interface (CIF)
R/3
APO
Orders
- Replenishment order
- Manufacturing order
- Procurement order
and so on
(distinction by
ATP category)
Purchase orders
Sales orders
Planned orders
Planned ind.reqmts
Reservations
Stocks and so on
R/3 transaction data APO transaction data
Core Interface
CIF
Integration
model

" The transaction data that is to be transferred into APO is specified in an integration model you define
in the R/3 System. The transaction data is mapped to orders in APO that differ by ATP category.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Initial data
transfer
Transaction Data Objects of the CIF
R/3
APO
Order with category
BF (PchOrd)
AG (PurRqs)
BM (SalesOrder)
AI (PlOrd.)
FA (FC req.)
AM (PrdRes)
CC (Stock)
...
R/3 transaction data APO transaction data
Purchase orders
Sales orders
Planned orders
Planned ind.reqmts
Reservations
Stocks
...
Real-
time
Incremental
data transfer

" The initial data transfer of transaction data is performed via the APO Core Interface (CIF). This is
usually automatically followed by the incremental data transfer between the R/3 and APO Systems
for transaction data objects that are members of an active integration model. New transaction data or
changes to existing transaction data are transferred automatically.
" The APO transaction data objects are generally not identical to those of the R/3 System. The system
transfers various R/3 transaction data into APO as orders that differ by ATP category.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Initial Data Transfer of Transaction Data: Overview
1. Generate integration model Name
Target sys.
Sales orders
Production/process orders
Storage location stock
...
Determine name and APO
target system
Select transaction data
2. Activate integration model
Integration model is active
Initial transfer of transaction data is performed,
followed by a continuous real-time incremental
data transfer
Start

" Define the integration model that controls the transfer of transaction data in the R/3 System. You can
find the menu option Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer (the CIF menu) under
Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning Interface.
" The integration model distinguishes between master data and transaction data. Select the two types
of data in separate integration models and then transfer them separately.
" Select the transaction data you want to transfer in the integration model. Specify the following in the
integration model:
$ The APO target system for the data transfer
$ The data objects you want to transfer
" You can delete integration models that you no longer need, but you must first deactivate them.
" The system usually performs a continuous real-time incremental data transfer between the R/3
System and APO for any transaction data from the production planning that is contained in an active
integration model.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Integration Model for Transaction Data
Name PC
Application TD
Sales orders
Planned orders
Storage location stocks
Sales orders
Material
Plant 1000
Name + application = unique definition of integration model
APO APO
System System
Selection of
transaction data types
Selection criteria for
the transaction data
Execute Save
+
...
...

" The transaction data transferred from the R/3 System to the APO System is defined in an integration
model. The R/3 System generates this integration model (transaction CFM1).
" An integration model is uniquely defined by its name and application. It is useful to create several
integration models with the same name, but as different applications. Ensure that the data pools of
your integration models are generally not too big. This allows you to handle errors more easily.
" The target system you specified in the integration model determines the APO System that the
transaction data is transferred into. The target system is a logical (APO) system that must have an
RFC connection. The APO System determines the (R/3) target system to be used for a retransfer
from APO to the R/3 System.
" You use a particular integration model to specify which transaction data you want to transfer. To do
so, you first specify the transaction data types that are to be added to the integration model.
Secondly, you specify the selection criteria that will be used to select the individual documents in the
R/3 System.
" You complete the generation of the integration model by executing the model (this means that the
data objects of the model are compiled) and then you save it.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Activate Integration Model for Transaction Data
Name PC
Application TD
Integration model
"Activate"
Active/Inact.
PC APOCLNT800 TD
Start
Transaction data
in APO
Material master A
Material master A
Sales order B
Sales order A
R/3
Material master A
Material master A
Sales order B
Sales order A
10:00:00
R/3
Sales order B
Sales order A
Incremental
data transfer
automatic
APO

" You must activate the integration model to transfer transaction data between R/3 and APO. You
activate an integration model with the transaction Activate integration model (transaction code
CFM2) in the CIF.
" You can have several integration models active at a time.
" Choose the Start function to trigger the initial data transfer. This means that the transaction data you
have selected is transferred into APO for the first time. This initial transfer is usually automatically
followed by the real-time link between the R/3 System and the APO System, concerning the selected
transaction data. This means that once a storage location stock of a selected material changes due to a
goods movement posting, the new stock is transferred into APO. In the same way, production orders
that are generated in APO are immediately transferred to the R/3 System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Publication of Planning Results
Planning results in
APO
APO
For example
Delivery x R/3
or
Collect the
changes
Delivery x
Online
transfer
Which
R/3 System?
R/3
Plant A
Plant B

" For TP/VS, there are three transactions that are used to process transfers of APO planned documents
to the R/3 System:
$ /SAPAPO/VS50 Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation
$ /SAPAPO/VS52 Check release of Planned Orders
$ /SAPAPO/VS51 Transmit planned Shipments to OLTP System
" In the Basic settings (publication of planning results) operation in APO Customizing, specify for
each plant and publication type (for example, deliveries and transports (shipments) ), the R/3 System
in which you are going to publish your planning results (name of the logical system). You must
complete this table, even if you only operate one R/3 System.
" The publication process can be performed in TP/VS after the shipments have been planned and
released.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Distribution Definition
Planned Shipment and Delivery Documents can be
transferred fro APO to R/3 for Plant 1200:

APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Basis Settings
IntegrationPublicationMaintain Distribution Definition

" Settings in the Distribution Definition table determine which planning documents can be sent
(published) to an external system, such as the R/3 System, for execution.
" For TP/VS, Publication Types 330 (Transport) and 340 (Deliveries) are relevant. An entry should be
made in this table for all plants/DCs that have deliveries and shipment documents for execution.
" In addition to the Location, the Logical System to which the documents are to be transferred and the
R/3 System Release must be specified.
" Using the Generate and Delete Distribution Definition customizing activity, multiple Distribution
Definition records can be created at one time. This capability is particularly helpful if a large number
of locations (plants/DCs) are involved in planning.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Transfer of Transaction Data between the R/3 and
APO Systems
! Initial and Incremental Transaction Data Transfer
! Integration Model for the Transfer of Transaction
Data
! Publication of Delivery and Shipment Data from the
APO to R/3 Systems.
Transfer of Transaction Data: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Unit: Transfer of Transaction Data
Topic: Integration Model for Transaction Data

Create an Integration Model to transfer TP/VS-related
transaction data via the CIF to APO.

Transportation-relevant transactions from the R/3 System must be
transferred via the CIF to APO. In addition, inventory-relevant
stocks must also be transferred to APO if ATP checking is to be
performed in APO. You will create an integration model to
enable this transfer.
1-1 Create, generate, and activate an integration model GR## in R/3 to transfer the
following transaction and inventory-relevant stocks to the target APO system:
Sales Orders
Purchase Orders
Stock Transport Orders
Stocks:
Storage Location
Special stocks with customer
Sales order stocks
Special stocks with vendor
Stocks in transit
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-1-1 Create the integration model: GR##.
Use TD as your Application code.
Restrict your transaction data (Sales orders, purchase orders, and stock
transports) selection to that data that belongs to your group number. Use the
data in the following table to restrict the selection of data to your supply
chain network.

Transaction Type Data to
Select
Sales orders/P.O.s/Stk Figures:
Materials
T-ATC1-##
T-ATD2-##
T-ATD3-##
Sales orders/P.O.s/Stk Figures: Plants 10##
12##
22##
25##
Save the settings as a variant: GR##-TD
1-1-3 Activate the model.
1-2 Record the stock balances from the ATP data in APO:
1-2-1 Product: T-ATC1-##
Plant 10## ________________________________
Plant 12## ________________________________
Plant 22## ________________________________
Plant 25## ________________________________
1-2-2 Product: T-ATD2-##
Plant 10## ________________________________
Plant 12## ________________________________
Plant 22## ________________________________
Plant 25## ________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-2-3 Product: T-ATD3-##
Plant 10## ________________________________
Plant 12## ________________________________
Plant 22## ________________________________
Plant 25## ________________________________
1-3 To test the CIF interface and your integration model, you will create sales orders to
be shipped from your Dresden plant to two different customers. To test the
purchasing transaction transfer, you will create a purchase order from one of your
vendors for materials to be received in your Hamburg plant. A stock transport order
will be created to transfer stock for a material to your Paris plant.
1-3-1 Create a sales order:
Order Type: OR
Customer Sold-to: T-S11A##
Purchase Order Number: 09-1-##
Requested Delivery Date: Today + 2 weeks
Material: T-ATC1-## 50 PC
1-3-2 What plant is on the line item in sales order? _______________
1-3-3 Record the order document number: ________________________
Order type: OR
Customer Sold-to: T-S11B##
Purchase Order Number: 09-2-##
Requested Delivery Date: Today + 2 weeks
Material: T-ATC1-## 55 PC
1-3-5 What plant is on the line item in sales order? _______________
1-3-6 Record the order document number: ________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-3-7 Create a Purchase Order :
Order Type: NB
Vendor: T-S11F##
Purchasing Org: 1000
Purchasing Group: 001
Company Code: 1000
Material: T-ATD2-## 300 PC
Price: 850.00 EUR
Delivery Date: In two weeks
Plant: 10##
Set the Confirmation Control on the line item for ANLI Inbound delivery.
1-3-8 Record the PO Document Number: _______________________
1-3-9 Create a Stock Transport Order:
Order Type: NB
Vendor: T-S100## (Intercompany Plant vendor)
Purchasing Org: 2200
Purchasing Group: 220
Company Code: 2200
Material: T-ATC1-##100 PC
Price: 345.00 EUR
Delivery Date: In two weeks
Plant: 22##
1-3-10 Record the Document Number: ____________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Exercises

Topic: Customizing for Publication

Make the necessary customizing settings in APO to publish
and transfer delivery and shipment document data to the R/3
Sysytem.

After the transportation planning has been performed by TP/VS,
the planned delivery and shipment documents are transferred to
the R/3 System for the execution process.
2-1 You will make the required settings in APO to allow the transfer of planned
delivery and shipment document data from APO to the R/3 System via the CIF.
There are two Publication Types that are relevant for TP/VS planned documents:
330 Transports for shipment documents
340 Deliveries for delivery documents
The publication type combined with the inbound/outbound location code, the
logical system and the R/3 System release number are required for each entry in the
customizing table.
You will need to make an entry for both publication types for each of your plants
and vendors.
Plants: 10##, 12##, 22##, 25##
Vendors: T-S11F##, T-S11H##, T-S100##
After you have created your entries in the Distribution Definition table, save the
table.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Integration Model for Transaction Data
1-1 Create, generate and activate your Master Data Integration Model:
1-1-1 Create the integration model:
Integration Model Generate Create
Enter Model Name: GR##
Enter Target System: your APO logical system
Enter Application: TD
In the Add to integration model check boxes, set the following:
Sales orders
POs and Preqs

Special stocks with customer
Sales order stocks
Special stocks with vendor
Stck in trnsit
In POs and PReqs, enter your material numbers by first selecting Multple
selection on the Material line.
Then, in the Single vals tab enter your material numbers.
Choose Copy.
Iin the Plants line, choose Multiple selection and enter the plants for which
to copy the material masters in the Single vals tab.
Choose Copy.
In Sales Orders, enter your material numbers by first selecting Multple
selection button on the Material line.
Then, in the Single vals tab enter your material numbers.
Choose Copy.
In the Plants line, choose Multiple selection and enter the plants for which to
copy the material masters in the Single vals tab.
Choose Copy.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y


In Stock figures, enter your material numbers by first selecting the Multple
selection on the Material line.
In the Single vals tab enter your material numbers.
Choose Copy.
Then, in the Plants line, choose Multiple selection and enter, in the Single
vals tab, the plants for which to copy the relevant quantities.
Choose Copy.
Before the model is generated, you will create a Variant of the model. This
variant is necessary if you want to run the model in a background process
later.
Choose Save.
In the ABAP Variant screen, enter your variant name: GR##-TD and a
description of your own choosing.
Choose Save.
Choose Execute.
Upon completion of the model generation, you will get a message indicating
the model was generated.
1-1-3 Activate the Model.
Integration Model Generate Activate
Enter your Model, Logical System, and APO Application code if not present
in the fields.
Choose Execute.
Place your cursor on the line with the Date, Time, and User-ID.
Select Active/Inactive.
A green check mark should appear next to the line indicating that the model
has been made active.
Select the Start button to do the actual transfer of data to the APO system.
After the transfer has been activated, you will get a confirmation message.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

1-2 Record the stock balances that have been transferred from the R/3 System to APO
by using the Global ATP Product Availability Report.
APO SAP Menu Global ATP Reporting /SAPAPO/AC03 - Product Availability
1-2-1 Enter T-ATC1-## in the Product field
Enter the plant 10## in the Location field
Enter A in the Business Event field.
Choose Enter.
Record the stock balance from the ATP data.
Repeat this process for the remaining plants/DC's.
1-2-2 Enter T-ATD2-## in the Product field.
Enter the plant 10## in the Location field.
Choose Enter.
Repeat this process for the remaining plants/DCs.
1-2-3 Enter T-ATD3-## in the Product field.
Enter the plant 10## in the Location field.
Choose Enter.
Repeat this process for the remaining plants/DCs.
1-3 Create sales orders, a purchase order, and a stock transport order:
R/3 SAP Menu: Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order
VA01 Create
Enter the Order Type: OR
Choose Enter.
On the next screen, enter the data from the exercise and press Enter.
1-3-2 Select the Shipping tab. Record the plant that is on the line item.
1-3-3 Choose Save. Record the document number.
1-3-4 Create the second sales order following the procedure above but using the
data from Exercise section 1-3-4.
1-3-5 Record the plant that is on the line item.
1-3-6 Save the sales order and record the document number.
1-3-7 Create a Purchase Order:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

R/3 SAP Menu Logistics Materials management Purchasing
Purchase Order Create ME21N - Vendor/Supplying Plant Known
Order Type: NB
Enter the Vendor Number in the Vendor field.
Enter the Purchasing Org., Purchasing Group, and Company Code in the
Org.data tab of the Header section.
Enter the Material Number-related data in the Item Overview section.
Choose Save.
1-3-8 Record the purchase order document number.
1-3-9 Create a Stock Transport order:
R/3 SAP Menu Logistics Materials management Purchasing
Purchase Order Create ME21N - Vendor/Supplying Plant Known
Order Type: NB
Enter the Vendor Number in the Vendor field.
Enter the Purchasing Org., Purchasing Group, and Company Code in the
Org.data tab of the Header section.
Enter the Material Number-related data in the Item Overview section.
Choose Save.
1-3-10 Record the purchase order document number.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Solutions

Topic: Customizing for Publication
2-1 Update in APO customizing the Distribution Definition table:
APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optinizer (APO) Basis Settings Integration
Publication Maintain Distribution Definition
Choose the New Entries button.
For each Plant/DC and Vendor, create an entry for the Publication Types 330 and
340, combined with the Logical System Number of the R/3 System. The system
will insert the R/3 release.
After all entries are made, Save

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Monitoring of Application Errors Using the qRFC
Monitor
! Error Analysis in the Application Log
! SCM Queue Manager
! Notification about Queue Blocks Using qRFC Alert
! Compare and Reconcile Functions to Ensure Data
Consistency in the R/3 and APO Systems
Monitoring and Error Handling
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Use the qRFC Monitor to monitor application
errors
! Use the Application Log to perform an error
analysis
! Explain the concept of the SCM Queue
Manager
! Describe the compare and reconcile functions
used to ensure data consistency in the R/3 and
APO Systems
Monitoring and Error Handling: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! In the event of a failure in the transferral of data
between the R/3 System and APO, knowledge of
the tools that can be used to find and resolve the
problem is a necessity.
Monitoring and Error Handling: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Integration Monitoring
R/3 APO
! R/3
" qRFC Monitor (transaction SMQ1 + SMQ2)
" Application log (transaction CFG1)
! APO
" qRFC Monitor (transaction SMQ1 + SMQ2)
" Application log (transaction /SAPAPO/C3)
! Monitoring both R/3 and APO from within APO:
" SCM Queue Manager (transaction /SAPAPO/CQ)
" qRFC Alert (transaction /SAPAPO/CW)
! Evaluation of Application log
# Transaction SLQ

" The APO Core Interface (CIF) offers two monitoring functions to monitor the data transfer from R/3
to APO, as well as from APO to R/3; the Application log evaluation and transfer queue(s) display.
" In addition, the qRFC Alert is used to monitor the outbound queues in APO and R/3 that are
relevant to APO-R/3 integration. If queue blocks are detected, a message is sent to a predefined
destination.
" Instead of evaluating the application logs in both systems (R/3 and APO) separately when errors
occur, the user can use the central SCM Queue Manager available in APO to monitor the queues
and application logs in both systems.
" You can find the Troubleshooting Guidelines Integration R/3 APO on the R/3 Plug-in homepage
on SAPNet (alias: R3-Plug-in) under Media Center Literature. This document is intended to help
you to localize and solve problems that arise when integrating R/3 and APO. It describes the transfer
technology, the prerequisites that a data transfer must fulfill, systematic troubleshooting, the steps
that must be taken when a particular error occurs, as well as how to handle special cases.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
qRFC Monitor: Motivation
R/3 APO
Remote
Function
Call (RFC)
Core Interface
(Selection and
extraction of
data)
Core Interface Core Interface
(Selection and (Selection and
extraction of extraction of
data) data)
Master/
Movement data
Master/
Movement data
APO master/
transaction data
live
Cache
live
Cache
Asynchronous transfer technology
1. Buffer data
2. Transfer to target system
- Communication errors
- Application errors
Remote
Function
Call (RFC)
APO
transaction data
qRFC Monitor
qRFC Monitor

" Usage: The communication between R/3 and APO is based on the asynchronous transfer technology
of the queued Remote Function Call (qRFC). A Remote Function Call (RFC) enables calling a
function module on a different server. This technology is used in the integration between APO and
R/3 both for the initial data supply and incremental data transfer (from R/3 to APO) as well as for the
publication of planning results (from APO to R/3).
" The data is first buffered by the sending system and then transferred to the target system. The major
advantage of this is that the application that triggered the data transfer does not have to wait until the
update has been completed in the target system. However, this means that return parameters cannot
be passed on, and potential error messages cannot be returned to the application directly.
" Two types of errors are distinguished for the processing of qRFC modules:
1. Communication errors: This includes network problems, a non-existing RFC destination, and so
on. Since the data transfer is repeated after certain periods, most of these communication errors
should disappear once the network connection is available again.
2. Application errors: This includes program errors, failed data update in the target system, locking
of objects, and missing master data for specific transaction data. Application errors cannot be solved
by the system and must be handled by the system administrator.
" The main instance for monitoring application errors is the qRFC Monitor. It is available both in R/3
and APO. Any queue for the target system is displayed here. Current qRFC entries can be displayed,
activated, debugged, or deleted in the qRFC Monitor.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Using the qRFC Monitor (1)
CF_ADC_LOAD
qRFC Monitor (Outbound queue)
Client Queue name Destination Entries
APOCLNT800 3 800
Refresh
CRM_DELT_MATERIAL IPC 3 800
CF_ADC_LOAD APOCLNT800 3 800
Status
SYSFAIL
1. Date
02.10.2002
...
...
Refresh Activate queue Lock queue Unlock queue
MUSTER /SAPAPO/CIF_LOC_INBOUND 800
Status text
You are not authorized to logon
Refresh Execute LUW
Client User Function module
Client Queue name Destination
Debug LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
MUSTER /SAPAPO/CIF_PROD_INBOUN 800 Transaction recorded
MUSTER /SAPAPO/CIF_RES_ INBOUND 800 Transaction recorded
Queue channel CF_ADC_LOAD = initial data transfer
R/3
Master data
transfer
Example: qRFC Monitor in R/3
Example: qRFC Monitor in R/3

" During the initial data supply, transfer errors are automatically detected when an integration model is
activated. A dialog box appears from which the user can navigate to the qRFC Monitor (by choosing
qRFC Monitor). In addition, you can choose the Repeat and Ignore functions in the dialog box. If
you choose Repeat, the system attempts to start initial data transfer again (for example, only a
temporary problem in system communication). You can choose Ignore if an online transfer (for
example, stocks) is stuck in the qRFC Monitor. As online transfers (for example, stocks) do not
block the data channel completely, the initial data transfer can be carried out in the dialog mode,
ignoring the entry in the qRFC Monitor. If, however, an earlier initial data transfer (for example,
master or transaction data) has failed, it blocks further initial transfers. In this case, you must
navigate to the qRFC Monitor and analyze the problem.
" During online transfer (for example, during stock posting in the R/3 System), transfer errors during
runtime are not displayed in the dialog mode. This means that if data has not been transferred
between APO and R/3, you need to check for red entries in the qRFC Monitor of the system sending
the data. This check can be carried out automatically by qRFC Alert.
" A qRFC Monitor is available in R/3 outbound processing (transaction SMQ1) and in APO outbound
processing (transaction SMQ1). By double-clicking the relevant line, all function calls for the
transfer channel selected are displayed in the qRFC Monitor (you can find the INBOUND function
modules available in APO in the Object Navigator, transaction SE80, under development class
/sapapo/cif). The top function module blocks all following entries in the case of an error. You can
display the current status text from the error short text. A detailed error message is stored in the
application log of the target system. In the above example, the user from the RFC destination was
either locked in APO or did not exist.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Material C
R/3 APO
Queue Channels for Data Transfer: Example
CF_ADC_LOAD
Initial transfer
Master and
transaction data
Queue channels
PPM for material C, D, material D
APO master/
transaction data
live
Cache
live
Cache CFPO[PO number]
PO number 4711
Material A
Online
transfer
Purchase
orders
PO number 4712
Material A
CFMAT[mat.no.]
Material A
Incremental
data transfer
Material
Material B
(if an active integration model
exists for purchase orders for
material A)
Material A
Material B
PPM Material A
PPM Material B
Material E
Integration model Y
Integration model Z
PPM for material A, B; material A, B
Integration model X
(active)
(Data channel blocked)
(if active integration models
exist for materials A and B)

" In the above example, material C could not be transferred. It blocks the queue for the following data
to be transferred initially (to ensure data consistency, a queue is processed sequentially). However,
incremental data transfers for master data or online transfers for transaction data can still be carried
out at the same time, provided that an active integration model exists for the master or transaction
data in question.
" The following queue channels are available in the interface: Initial data transfer CF_ACD_LOAD,
stocks CFSTK*, purchase orders and purchase requisitions CFPO*, planned orders/production orders
CFPLO*, sales orders CFSLS*, manual reservations CFRSV*, confirmations CFCNF*, planned
independent requirements CFPIR*, requirement reduction independent requirements CFMAT*,
production campaigns CFPCM*, master data classes CFCLA*, master data characteristics CFCHR*,
transportation CFSHP*, and planning tables CFCUVT* (in online transfers, * stands for the number
of the purchase order, sales order, and so on, and in incremental data transfers of master data, for
example, * stands for the material number).
" If only temporary communication errors occur in the network connection, the failed transfers (entry
in the qRFC Monitor) can be re-started (by choosing Activate queue in the qRFC Monitor). If you
only want to re-start one object type (for example, locations) within a queue, you can choose the
Execute LUW function to repeat the transfer of locations. If you want to specify that the queue is
automatically activated again if transfer errors occur, you can set up the RFC destination (transaction
SM59) in such a way that the system makes several new attempts to transfer the data at certain time
intervals. To do so, choose Destination !TRFC Options in the RFC destination and maintain, for
example, the value 20 in the Connection attempts up to task field and the value 2 in the Time betw. 2
tries [mins] field. The system then makes 20 attempts in two-minute intervals to start the transfer (if
no entries are made in these fields, the default setting applies, that is, 20 attempts in 15-minute
intervals). If you do not want to use this function, enter X in the Suppress background job field.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Example: qRFC Monitor in APO
Example: qRFC Monitor in APO
Using the qRFC Monitor (2)
CFEP3040
qRFC Monitor (Outbound queue)
Client Queue name Destination Entries
R3CLNT800 1 800
Refresh
CFIP3056 R3CLNT800 1 800
CFIP3056 R3CLNT800 1 800
Status
SYSFAIL
1. Date
02.10.2002
...
...
Refresh Activate queue Lock queue Unlock queue
MUSTER CIF_ORDER_INBOUND_30A 800
Status text
No active integration model
Refresh Execute LUW
Client Queue name Destination
Debug LUW (Logical Unit of Work)
MUSTER CIF_ORDER_INBOUND_30A 800 Transaction recorded
Queue channel CFIP* = In-house production
APO
Planned order
created in APO

" In the example, a planned order for a finished product and purchase requisitions for the components
of the finished product were created in APO. However, they were not included in any active
integration model in the R/3 System at the time when the order was created in APO.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Application
log
R/3:
Error
R/3 APO
RFC
Core Interface Core Interface Core Interface
Master/
transaction data
Master/
transaction data
APO master/
transaction data
live
Cache
live
Cache
Application Log: Motivation
RFC
Application
log
APO:
Error

" Display entries: You can use the application log to trace when (time), and what (data objects and
integration model) was transferred by whom (user). In addition, the application log provides a
detailed error message if an application error occurred. As a prerequisite, logging must have been
switched on. If errors occurred during transfers, detailed error messages are stored in the application
log of the target system.
" Prerequisite: Logging mode switched on (transaction CFC2 in R/3 and /SAPAPO/C4 in APO; you
can make settings as required under Logging).
% Normal (only the number of data records transferred is logged)
% Detailed (the number and content of the data records transferred is logged): Detailed logging can
easily lead to large database tables and decreased performance when used in a productive system.
For this reason, we recommend using detailed logging only when the data is needed (for example,
in the implementation phase).
" Delete entries: You can delete logs of the application log in R/3 and APO. The system does not
delete the logs automatically. To prevent extreme database load, we recommend deleting the logs
periodically. If you want, you can schedule background processing. If you do not make an entry in
the date and time fields, all logs older than two weeks are deleted automatically.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Using the Application Log (1)
MUSTER /SAPAPO/CIF_TPSRC_INBOU 800
Status text
Loc. 0000001003 does not exist
Refresh
MUSTER /SAPAPO/CIF_GEN_EVENT 800 Transaction recorded
qRFC Monitor R/3
MUSTER Initial data supply 02.10.2002 530
User Subobject type Date Number
R/3 Application Log
USERADMIN Sources of supply 02.10.2002 4
APO Application Log
Problem class: very important
Problem class: medium
Problem class: additional information
Location 0000001003 does not exist
Function: CIF_LOCATION_SEND: Plant 1000
Example: Application Log in R/3
Example: Application Log in R/3

" In the example, an initial data supply was carried out in the R/3 System to transfer several different
master data, including purchasing info records. One of the purchasing info records transferred was
for a vendor that does not exist in APO.
" Message display: You can select different subobjects for the CIF object in the R/3 and APO
application log. These include, EP External procurement (inbound), IP In-house production
(inbound), or INITIAL Initial supply and LOCATION Location: customer, plant, vendor (for
performance reasons, the entries for an initial supply and an incremental data transfer are grouped
under the subobject INITIAL). For more subobjects, choose F4 for the Subobject field on the initial
screen of the application log. By double-clicking on a subobject, you can navigate to Messages for
the relevant transfer log. This provides an overview of the data objects that have been sent between
the systems. This function is particularly helpful when determining errors.
" qRFC Monitor: The transaction ID of the sending application serves as the key of an error message
(TID field in the qRFC line of the qRFC Monitor of the sending system). When you enter this
number, you can display all messages for this qRFC call in the target system. In the application log,
you enter the number of the transaction ID in the Ext. identif. field and execute the selection. The
system displays all messages for the call in question.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Using the Application Log (2)
Example: Application Log in APO
Example: Application Log in APO
Refresh APO qRFC Monitor
MUSTER In-house production 02.10.2002 120
APO Application Log
USERADMIN In-house production 02.10.2002 1
R/3 Application Log
Problem class: very important
Problem class: medium
Problem class: additional information
Inbound R3CLNT800: For system APOCLNT800 no active integration
model for type T_PLO filter object P-102 1000
Function: /SAPAPO/CIF_IP_OUTBOUND: Order material P-102, plant 1000
MUSTER CIF_ORDER_INBOUND_30A 800
Status text
No active integration model
MUSTER CIF_ORDER_INBOUND_30A 800 Transaction recorded

" In the example, a planned order for a finished product and purchase requisitions for the components
of the finished product have been created in APO. However, they were not included in any active
integration model in the R/3 System at the time when the order was created in APO. Therefore, the
orders were not created in R/3, but kept in the queue. In the outbound log, you always recognize the
log of successful transfers. In the logging of the target system, error messages are displayed if errors
occurred during transfers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SCM Queue Manager (1)
R/3
SCM Queue Manager
Systems
APO
Execute
Object types
Systems
R3CLNT800
Expand nodes
APO outbound types
EP
Plug-in outbound types
T_INITIAL
EP Ext. Procurement
IP In-House Production
...
T_INITIAL Initial trans.
T_ORD Planned ords,..
...
R/3
APO
RFC
RFC

" Instead of separately evaluating the application logs in both systems (R/3 and APO) when errors
occur, the user can use the central SCM Queue Manager available in APO (transaction
/n/SAPAPO/CQ) to monitor the queues and application logs in both systems.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SCM Queue Manager (2)
R3CLNT800
System: APOCLNT800 Type: In-house production
Queue Destination User Date
MUSTER
...
No active integration
model
Error text
CFIP3056
APOCLNT800
R3CLNT800
External procurement
In-house production
Planned ind. reqmnts
Planning file entries
Production campaigns
Sales order
Transportation
Delivery
Reservations
...
Initial supply
Purchase orders
Planned orders
Production orders
Sales orders
Planned ind. requirements.
Manual reservations
Production campaigns
Confirmations
Transportations
Stocks
Characteristics
Classes
R32CLNT800
Initial data supply...
Refresh Appl.log

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
qRFC Monitoring: Notification about Exception
Messages (1)
R/3 APO
RFC
Core Interface Core Interface Core Interface
Master/
Movement data
Master/
Movement data
APO master/ APO master/
transaction data transaction data
live
Cache
live
Cache
RFC
Mail to initiator or
administrator

" Usage: Application errors that occur during data transfer are not reported directly to the user because
data transfer between APO and R/3 is asynchronous. Instead, the qRFC entries block the outbound
queue. Any subsequent data transfers cannot pass the outbound queue. By monitoring the qRFC
exception message, queue blocks are detected and the following are notified:
% The initiator of the block via SAPOffice Inbox Mail (the initiator of every queue block receives a
message stating that he or she has caused a block)
% The administrator, via SAP Office Inbox or an Internet mail (one person is chosen to receive all
messages). If you want to send the messages to an e-mail address, you must make the necessary
settings in SAPconnect (Transaction /SCOT).
" Features: The report (transaction /N/SAPAPO/CW) monitors all APO outbound queues, and the
queues of the logical R/3 Systems connected to APO. Depending on the settings on the selection
screen, local qRFC-API modules in the APO system, or qRFC-API (Application Program Interface)
modules in the connected R/3 System, or both are called up synchronously and the status of the
relevant outbound queues is queried. You can find out the names of the relevant logical systems
from the selection screen entries, and from the entries in the /SAPAPO/SYSDIR table (to maintain,
use /SAPAPO/C2).
" If the system recognizes queue errors or blocks, a message is generated from the status information.
The message is sent via the SAPOffice API to the relevant destination(s) or administrator(s),
provided the settings are made accordingly. In addition, the list of all incorrect outbound queries is
output in list form.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
qRFC Monitoring: Notification about Exception
Messages (2)
R/3
qRFC Monitoring
Local outbound queues
APO
Execute
Remote outbound queues
Target systems
*
Local queue names
CF*
Queue errors only
Notification
No
To initiator
To administrator
MUSTER B
Remote systems
Destinations
Queue errors only (remote system)
Notification
...
Remote queue names
CF*

" Local outbound queues:
% 1. Enter the target system (logical system). You can use placeholders.
% 2. Enter the name of the queue to be monitored.
% 3. (Queue errors only indicator). Specify whether you want the monitor to only find real
application errors (SYSFAIL) (indicator set) temporary errors, such as communication errors
(CPICERR), or errors caused by temporary application locks (indicator not set).
% 4. Specify where the message is to be sent: No notification (the message is not sent and is only
displayed), To initiator (the message is sent to the initiator of the block), To administrator (all
messages are sent to one person): You can change the entry in the address field (the current user is
set as the default value).
% 5. Choose a recipient type. The recipient type determines the message format. You can now
choose between B (SAP user) and U (Internet address). If you choose recipient type U, ensure that
you make the relevant entries in SAPconnect.
% 6. Execute the report program. The message is sent or displayed on the screen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

" Remote outbound queues: In the Remote outbound queue groupbox, you define the settings for
monitoring the outbound queues of connected R/3 Systems:
% 1. In the Remote systems field, enter the name of the RFC destinations whose outbound queues
you want to monitor. You may use wildcards (for example SX*). If you do not enter anything,
none of the outbound queues of the connected systems are monitored.
% 2. In the Destinations in the remote system field, enter the name of the target systems called in the
remote system (usually the APO system itself). You may use wildcards (for example SX*).
% 3. In the Remote queue name field, enter the names of the R/3 outbound queues to be examined in
the remote systems to be monitored. All R/3 outbound queues that are addressed via the APO CIF
integration have CF as the prefix.
% 4. All other entries are made in the same way as for local outbound queues. If you want to run the
qRFC Alert periodically, you must schedule the report via the SAP job definition (transaction
SM37).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
R/3
Compare/Reconcile Function for Data
Inconsistencies in R/3 and APO: Compare
Report /SAPAPO/CIF_DELTAREPORT2
Sales orders
Objects to be checked
APO
Partner system (R/3) R3CLNT800
Material
P-102
Plant
100
Integration model Pump
... ...
Sales order stocks
... ...
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
live
Cache
Database
Compare

" Usage: Data inconsistencies between APO and R/3 can arise in certain circumstances (for example,
due to application errors or manual deletion of queue entries). The compare/reconcile function helps
you to identify and correct such data inconsistencies. In APO, the function covers the following
objects: Stock, sales order, planned order, production order, purchase order, and purchase requisition.
" When you use the compare/reconcile function, the system performs a comparison and lists any
inconsistent objects it identifies. Then you can select individual, several, or all objects for the
reconcile function. The selected data can be sent from R/3 to APO.
" Procedure: Start report program /SAPAPO/CIF_DELTAREPORT2 in the ABAP Editor of APO
(transaction SE38). Choose the R/3 System in the Partner system field. In addition, you can restrict
the compare/reconcile function to certain products, locations, integration models, or stocks and
transaction data by entering selection parameters, and therefore reducing the runtime of the
transaction.
" After the report has been executed, an overview of the results of the comparison is shown on the next
output screen, separated according to orders and stocks. A line with the following information is
displayed for every object type checked: Total (total number of R/3 objects selected for comparison),
Errors (total number of errors found), All other columns: (distribution of the errors to individual error
areas).
" You can run the DELTAREPORT also with Transaction /SAPAPO/CCR or report
/SAPAPO/CIF_DELTAREPORT3. This Deltareport is available from Release 3.1. You can
downgrade it for Release 3.0 by starting with Support Pack 19.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Compare/Reconcile Function for Data
Inconsistencies in R/3 and APO: Reconcile
R/3
Report results list
Sales orders
Documents
APO
...
...
live
Cache
Database
Sales orders
Supplies
Reconcile
Results Storage loc.
stocks
P-102
&Deviations in APO
Sent Material Stock
Quantity
APO Reason
& Send to APO
& Send to APO
11 10 ... 1000
Plant
0002
Storage
location
&
Execute

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Use the qRFC Monitor to monitor application
errors
! Use the Application Log to perform an error
analysis
! Explain the concept of the SCM Queue Manager
! Describe the compare and reconcile functions
used to to ensure data consistency in the R/3
and APO Systems
Monitoring and Error Handling: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Configuration and Customization Activities
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Understand activities required to configure the
TP/VS system
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings: Unit
Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! In preparation for running the TP/VS modeling and
optimization process, the planning environment is
established by making various customizing
settings and creating the necessary master data in
TP/VS.
Vehicle Scheduling (VS):
Basic Settings: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Optimization
Vehicle Scheduling)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Basic Settings
" Geocoding
" Number Ranges
" Determine Shipment Types
" Transportation Modes
" Transportation Groups
" Transportation
Methods/Vehicles
" Freight Units
! Optimization
" Profiles (Optimization/Cost)
" Transportation Methods and
Groups Compatibility
" Transportation Groups
Compatibility
" Transportation Methods and
Locations Compatibility
" Definition of Dimension
Units
! Carrier Selection
" Carrier Profile
! Interfaces (R/3 Related)
" Assignment of
Transportation Zone to
Locations
" Field Mapping of
Communication
Structures
! Backorder Processing
" Filters
" Sort Profiles
! Scheduling
VS General Customizing Activities

" APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
(TP/VS)
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Order of Maintenance
1. Creation of Master Data in R/3
2. Creation of Integration Models and the transfer of Master Data R/3 APO
$ Plants, DCs
$ Customers
$ Suppliers
$ Carriers
$ Materials
3. Creation of Transportation Groups
4. Creation of Transportation Modes
5. Creation of Transport Methods
6. Creation of Vehicle Resources and assignment to active model 000
7. Modeling in Supply Chain Engineer
8. Creation of Transportation Lanes
9. Assignment of Transport Methods to Transportation Lanes
10. Assignment of Carriers to Lanes and Transport Methods
Locations
Products

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Geocoding
Geocoding Table (APO IMG)
APO Location Master Record

" Geocoding enables the system to assign longitude and latitude coordinates to the various locations in
APO. These coordinates are used to estimate distances between locations.
" The geocoding program supplied by the SAP System determines the longitude and latitude based on
the Country and Region codes.
" the steps required to install third-party geocoding programs are included in the APO IMG
customizing activities. Customizing settings allows the geocoding program(s) to be assigned at the
Country code level.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
TP/VS Number Ranges
Define Number Range for Temporary Shipments
Define Number Range for Shipments
APO IMG: Advanced Planner and OptimizerTransportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings

" The temporary shipment number range is used to assign shipment numbers to shipment documents
created during the Route Optimization process.
" The Number Range for Shipments table is used to assign shipment numbers to shipment documents
that have been released to the R/3 System. This number range MUST match the number range
assignment in the R/3 System for External Number assignment.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Mode, Transportation Method,
Resources
Transp.
Mode
Transportation
Method
Vehicle
Resources
For example, Truck, Rail, Air,
Ship, and so on
For example, FTL, LTL,
Parcel Service,
Barge, and so on
For example, Maintenance of
capacities,depot locations, and
so on,for individual vehicles

Transportation Mode:
" APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Mode
" The Transportation Mode is a code defined to indicate the actual mode of transportation. This code
is assigned to the Transport Method. The Transportation Mode in TP/VS should correspond to the
Transportation Mode used in the R/3 System (R/3 IMG: Logistics
ExecutionTransportationBasic Transportation FunctionsRoutesDefine RoutesDefine
Modes of Transport).
Transport Method:
" APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Supply Chain Engineer (SCE)
Maintain Transport Method
" The Transport Method is used to identify a method of transportation (for example, a 48 truck with
full truck load capacity or refrigerated truck). The Transportation Methods are assigned to Vehicle
Resources in APO master data. In addition, the Transport Methods will be assigned to Transportation
Lanes.
Vehicle Resources
" APO SAP Menu: Master DataResource
" Vehicle Resources are used to represent a unit of transportation and its capacity and planning
parameters.
" A Vehicle Resource is independent of a particular carrier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-10
! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Groups
R/3
APO

" The Transportation Group is used to categorize materials according to their transportation
requirements. Like materials in the R/3 System, each APO Product is assigned to a Transportation
Group code. A product attribut for grouping could be refrigerated transportation required or
dangerous goods.
" The Transportation Group codes in APO should match the R/3 Transportation Group codes.
" APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/
Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Group
" R/3 IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Basic Transportation Functions
Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Groups
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-11
! SAP AG 2002
Freight Units

" APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic SettingsDefine Freight Units
" Sales Order Consolidation:
% This features allows for uniform schedule lines to be consolidated into one transport unit (restricts
the amount of data the optimizer has and gives greater clarity to the Interactive Planning Board).
For consolidation of sales orders, the following conditions must be met:
- The order items have the same goods recipient and the same desired delivery date
- All order items have the same transport group
- If this is not the case, individual transport units are created for all items or schedule lines
- Total items of an order per unit do not exceed the upper consolidation limit, maintained in the
TP/VS Optimizer in APO Customizing under Defining dimensions/units
- If any of these criteria is not fulfilled, no consolidation occurs and the individual order items
become individual transport units
" Planning of ATP Confirmed Dates or Required Dates:
% This feature allows you to choose the date to use for optimization; the ATP confirmed date or the
desired delivery date.
(Note: Choosing the ATP Confirmed Date is not compatible with the Order Consolidation feature)
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-12
! SAP AG 2002
Determine Shipment Type
R/3 Shipment
Type

APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS) InterfacesDetermine Shipment Type

" This customizing activity is used to map the Transportation Method and Inbound/Outbound
Shipment to the corresponding Shipment Type in the specified Logical System where the planned
shipment documents are to be transferred.
" The Shipment Types(Vehicle Column) must be defined in the R/3 System for the transfer of the
shipment to take place.
" R/3 Shipment Type can be found :
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-13
! SAP AG 2002
Transportation Matrix, Used for Deadheads
= Loaded Trip
= Deadhead
Point A
Plant
Point B
Customer
Point D
Plant
= Continued route

APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
(TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Matrix
" This customizing activity is used for private fleet vehicles and is not required for TP/VS for Route
Optimization and Scheduling.
" This activity indicates that a vehicle is not available immediately after a shipment has been delivered,
since the vehicle needs a certain amount of return time or time to reach the next loading point.
Example:
A shipment is transported from departure point A to destination B. Loading occurs at point A. While
it is on the way from A to B, this vehicle is not available for scheduling (the resource is in use). Once
the shipment has been delivered to point B, the resource is still not available, since it must first return
to point A to be loaded again. Therefore, the resource vehicle is in use for the following routes:
Transportation lane: A B
Dead-heading: B A

or

Continued route: B D
Available again: as of point A or D
" A Transportation Matrix is not used for an APO3.0 SP21 or greater or APO3.1 system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-14
! SAP AG 2002
How to maintain a Transportation Matrix

" Standard Settings:
You have maintained the corresponding transportation lanes and transportation times in the Supply
Chain Engineer.
" Activities:
Enter the vehicle key on the Transfer the Distance Matrix for Vehicles into the liveCache screen.
The liveCache uses the transportation times that were maintained in the Supply Chain Engineer
(Transportation Method) as a basis for calculating the empty run (deadheading) from the destination
point to the departure point.
" It is not necessary to maintain a transportation matrix starting with Support Package 20.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-15
! SAP AG 2002
! Understand activities required to configure the
TP/VS system
Vehicle Scheduling (VS):
Basic Settings: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-16
Exercises

Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings
Topic: Transportation Methods and Resources

Update the APO IMG with Transportation Methods
(Vehicles).
Navigate to the Transportation Mode and Group customizing
tables in the APO IMG.
Create Resources in APO Master data and assign them to
your supply chain network using the Supply Chain Engineer.

Before TP/VS can be used for planning, various customizing
settings must be completed to create the relationship between the
various modes of transportation that will be used to transport
shipments, the transportation methods that relate the speed and
working time availability of a given type of vehicle and the
capacity constraints of individual vehicle resources.
1-1 Review the settings in the Transportation Mode table in APO Customizing.
1-1-1 List the Transportation Modes that exist in the table:
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-17
1-2 Create two new transportation methods (vehicles) that you will use in your TP/VS
environment:
1-2-1 Create Transportation Method FTL## with the following settings:
Description: FTL Gr. ##
AverageSp: 80
Factor: 1.200
Work Time: 24:00
Component: Compatible with all
TranspMode: FTL
OwnTrMeth: blank
Schedule: blank
1-2-2 Create Transportation Method: LTL## with the following settings:
Description : LTL Gr. ##
AverageSp: 60
Factor: 1.400
Work Time: 24:00
Component: Compatible with all
TranspMode: LTL
OwnTrMeth: blank
Schedule: blank
1-2-3 Save the table.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-18
1-3 Create a Vehicle Resource with the following characteristics:
Resource: G##-FTRK01
Location: leave blank (This resource will be valid for all locations)
Planner: leave blank
Resource Category: T
Choose the Create button.
In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle tab and enter the
following data on the resource line:
Location: Leave blank
Vehicle: FTL##
Time zone: CET
Dimension: Mass
Factory Calendar: W8
Start: 00:00:00
End: 23:59:00
Capacity: 18000
Unit of Measure: KG
Finite Scheduling: Select
Choose Enter.
Select the Standard Capacity tab.
Create an addition dimension: Volume of 150 M3
Choose Save.
1-4 Create four additional vehicle resources with characteristics identical to the one you
just created: G##-FTRK01. They should have Vehicle Resource Numbers of G##-
FTRK02, G##-FTRK03, G##-FTRK04 and G##-FTRK05. Use the resource
Copy function to create these.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-19
1-5 Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-LTRK01 with the following characteristics:
Resource: G##-LTRK01
following data on the resource line:
Vehicle: LTL##
Time zone: CET
Dimension: Mass
Factory Calendar: W8
Start: 00:00:00
End: 23:59:00
Capacity: 9000
Unit of Measure: KG
Finite Scheduling: Select
Choose Enter.
Select the Standard Capacity tab.
Create an addition dimension: Volume of 75 M3
Choose Save.
1-6 Create four additional vehicle resources with characteristics identical to the one you
just created: G##-LTRK01. They should have Vehicle Resource Numbers of G##-
LTRK02, G##-LTRK03, G##-LTRK04 and G##-LTRK05. Use the resource
Copy function to create these.
1-7 Select and assign your new vehicle resources to your SCE work area:
Model: 000
Work Area: GR##
Transportation Resources: G##-FTRK01 through G##-FTRK05 and
G##-LTRK01 through G##-LTRK05.
After assigning the resources, Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-20
Exercises

Topic: Transportation Lane Creation

Create and maintain transportation lanes individually and
using the mass maintenance function.

The transportation lane represents the path that transportation
shipments follow to move merchandise between a source
(plant/DC, Vendor) and a target location (customer, plant/DC).
Associated with the transportation lanes are the transportation
methods. A critical step in establishing the necessary master data
for TP/VS planning is creation of the transportation lanes.
2-1 Create a pair of transportation lanes between your two plants:
2-1-1 Create the transportation lane from plant 10## to 12##.
2-1-2 Assign to these two lanes the transportation methods you have created:
FTL## and LTL##.
2-1-3 In the Product Procurement section of the transportation lane, select All
Products. The validity periods for all objects related to the transportation
lanes should be: Start date is today's date, the End date should be:
12/31/9999.
2-1-4 Assign to the lane the transportation methods you have created: FTL## and
LTL##. Perform the Generate proposal process to have the system
calculate the distance between the plants automatically. Assign a cost of
1.000 per KM as the transportation cost.
2-1-5 Choose Save.
2-1-6 Create a second transportation lane: from plant 12## to 10##.
For this lane assign a transportation cost of 1.200 per KM.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-21
2-2 Using the Mass Creation of Transportation Lanes function create the following
transportation lanes based on the transportation lane from 10## to 12##.
2-2-1 Source Target
12## T-S11A##
T-S22A##
T-S33A##
T-S11B##
T-S11C##
2-2-2 Source Target
T-S11F## 10##
T-S11H## 10##
2-3 After creating the transportation lanes, display them to verify that both
transportation methods have been assigned to each lane. Use the Supply Chain
Engineer to do this check. In addition, delete the circular lanes created during the
mass transportation lane creation process.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-22
Exercises

Topic: Shipment Type Determination

Make the required settings in APO customizing to determine
the R/3 Transportation Shipment Types.

After shipments are planned in TP/VS, they will be "published"
and transferred to the R/3 System for execution. A shipment type
must be determined for the process to work properly. You will
make the required setting for the assignment of the R/3 shipment
types.
3-1 Update the Shipment Type determination table to assign the Shipment Types you
created in the R/3 System, AI## and AO##.
3-1-1 Create an entry in the Shipment Type Determination table for each of your
Transportation Methods, FTL## and LTL##, for the Shipment Types AI##
and AO##. Use the Logical System Number of the R/3 System.
3-1-2 Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-23
Exercises

Topic: Mapping Table for Vehicles

Perform the APO customizing required to map the
Transportation Methods to the corresponding Packaging
Material that represent the Methods of Transport in R/3.

Your business processes include packing materials from the
deliveries into handling units that will be packed into the method
of transportation. To facilitate this you want the shipment
documents to include a packaging material that represents the
trailer, container, or other unit of transportation. To have the
packaging material created automatically when the shipment
document is transferred to R/3 you will have to update the
Mapping Table for Vehicles.
4-1 Create an entry in the Mapping Table for Vehicles for the packaging materials
created in R/3, FTL-## and LTL-##, that represent the transportation methods
FTL## and LTL##, respectively.
Note: The alphabetic characters in the material number in the ExtVehDesc
field must be entered in all capital letters.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-24
Solutions

Topic: Transportation Methods and Resources
1-1 Display the Transportation Mode table:
APO Customizing Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation
Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Mode
1-1-1 List the transportation modes shown in the table.
1-2 Create the new transportation methods:
APO Customizing Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Supply Chain Engineer
(SCE) Maintain Transport Method
1-2-1 Create the first Transportation Method by selecting the New Entries
Enter FTL## in Vehicle field.
Enter the remainder of the data as specified in the exercise.
1-2-2 Enter LTL## in the Vehicle field.
Enter the remainder of the data as specified in the exercise.
1-2-3 Choose Save.
1-3 Create a Vehicle Resource, G##-FTRK01:
APO SAP Menu Master Data Resource
Resource: G##-FTRK01
remaining data as indicated in the exercise and Save the record.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-25
1-4 Create four additional Vehicle Resources using the Copy function:
Enter: Resource: G##-FTRK01
Select the Change Resource button.
Select the Resource line with G##-FTRK01.
Select the "Copy Resources" button.
Select Replicate all Selected Resources .
Enter 2 in the Start number field.
Enter 4 in the Number of resources field.
Change the New Resource Entry field by removing the last digit of the resource. It
should look like G##-FTRK0 after the change.
Select Copy Object.
Choose Save.
Choose Back.
1-5 Create Vehicle Resource, G##-LTRK01.
APO SAP Menu Master Data Resource
Resource: G##-LTRK01
data as indicated in the exercise and Save the record.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-26
1-6 Create four additional Vehicle Resources using the Copy function:
Enter: Resource: G##-LTRK01
Select the Change Resource button.
Select the Resource line with G##-LTRK01.
Select the Copy Resources button.
Select the Replicate all Selected Resources
Enter 2 in the Start number field.
Enter 4 in the Number of resources field.
Change the New Resource Entryfield by removing the last digit of the resource. It
should look like G##-LTRK0 after the change.
Select the Copy Object.
Choose Save.
Choose Back.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-27
1-7 Update your SCE work area to include your new vehicle resources:
APO SAP Menu Master Data Supply Chain Engineer Maintain Model
Enter: Model: 000
Work Area: GR##
Select the Change Model button.
Choose the Resources tab.
Choose the Transport resources title field.
Right-click on the Transport resources title field.
Select Add Objects to Work Area.
In the pop-up window, enter G##-FTRK01 and G##-FTRK05 in the two Internal
char. value fields on the first line.
Enter G##-LTRK01 and G##-LTRK05 in the two Internal char. value fields on
the second line.
Select the Copy button. (green check mark).
The vehicle resources will not appear under the Transport resources heading.
Select all of your resources in the list by mouse-clicking on the first resource and
then shift mouse-click on the remaining resources.
Right mouse-click on the selected resources.
Select Add to model.
Choose Continue when the pop-up box displays.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-28
Solutions

Topic: Transportation Lane Creation
2-1 Create the transportation lanes from Plant 10## to Plant 12## and from Plant 12##
to Plant 10##:
APO SAP Menu Master data Transportation Lanes
2-1-1 Enter the following:
Model: 000
Source loc.: 10##
Target loc.: 12##
Select the Create button.
2-1-2 In the Product Procurement section of the screen, select the Creation of a
new entry icon.
When the Product procurement entry box opens:
Select All products.
Enter today's date in the Start date field.
Enter 12/31/9999 in the End date field.
Select Copy and close (the green check mark).
2-1-3 In the Means of trans section, select the Creation of a new entry icon.
When the Transportation method entry box opens:
Enter FTL## in the Transport method field.
De-select the Aggr. planning option.
Select the Generate proposal button.
After the distance is calculated, enter 1.000 in the TranMethods Costs field.
Select the Copy icon (it's the middle one at the top of the box).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-29
2-1-4 Create a second Means of Trans :
Enter FTL## in the Transport method field.
De-select the Aggr. planning option.
Select the Generate proposal button.
After the distance is calculated, enter 1.000 in the TranMethods Costs field.
Select the Copy and close icon (it's the green check mark at the top of the
box).
21-5 Choose Save.
2-1-6 Create the second transportation lane:
Model: 000
Source loc.: 12##
Target loc.: 10##
Select the Create button.
Perform the same procedure as outline in sections 2-1-2 through 2-1-5
above, except enter 1.200 as the TranMethods Costs.
2-2 Create the remaining transportation lanes using the Mass Creation of Transportation
Lanes function:
APO SAP Menu Master data Mass Creation of Transportation Lanes
2-2-1 Create the transportation lanes using the following:
Copy from: Source: 10##
Target: 12##
Creation of transportation lanes between locations:
Source: 12##
Target: T-S11A##
T-S22A##
T-S33A##
T-S11B##
T-S11C##
(Use the Multiple Selection function to enter the list of Target locations)
Select Execute.
When the dialog box pops up asking if you want to continue and displays
the number of lanes to be created (there should be 5), select Y.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-30
2-2-2 Create the transportation lanes between the Vendors and Plant 10## and
create the return lanes:
Create the transportation lanes using the following:
Target: 12##
Source: T-S11F##
10##
Target: 10##
T-S11F##
Select the Execute button.
the number of lanes to be created (there should be 4), select Y.
Why are there four lanes? _____________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Create the lanes between Vendor T-S11H## and Plant 10##:
Target: 12##
Source: T-S11H##
10##
Target: 10##
T-S11H##
the number of lanes to be created (there should be four), select Y.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-31
2-3 Check your Work Area in the Supply Chain Engineer to make sure the lanes were
created properly:
APO SAP Menu Master Data Supply Chain Engineer Maintain Model
Model: 000
Work Area: GR##
Select the Change button.
Use the Zoom in icon to display, with clarity, the transportation lanes attached to
your Vendors: T-S11F## and later, T-S11H##.
Notice the single arrowhead attached to Vendor T-S11F##. This is the lane that was
created during the mass creation of the lanes. You will delete it as follows:
Place your cursor on the arrowhead. A box should pop up identifying the lane: T-
S11F## - T-S11F##.
Right-click. In the popup box select Delete. In the Confirm deletion popup box,
select Yes.
Delete the second circular lane created for Vendor T-S11H##.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-32
Solutions

Topic: Shipment Type Determination
3-1 Update the Shipment Type Determination table to assign your R/3 System shipment
types:
Scheduling (TP/VS) Interfaces Determine Shipment Type
3-1-1 Select New Entries button.
Enter FTL## in the Trsp.Meth field.
Enter the R/3 Logical System Number.
Select I Inbound in the In/outbound Shipment field.
Enter AI## in the Vehicle field.
On the next line, repeat the process but:
Select O Outbound in the In/outbound Shipment field and
Enter AO## in the Vehicle field.
Create two more lines in the table using the same steps as above but with
Transportation Method LTL##
3-1-2 Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 10-33
Solutions

Topic: Mapping Table for Vehicles
4-1 Create the entries in the Mapping Table for Vehicles:
Scheduling (TP/VS) Interfaces Maintain Mapping Table for Vehicles
Select the New Entries button.
Enter FTL-## (must use capital letters) in the ExtVehDesc field.
Select the Logical System Number of the R/3 System.
Enter FTL## in the Vehicle field.
On the next line:
Enter LTL-## (must use capital letters) in the ExtVehDesc field.
Select the Logical System Number of the R/3 System.
Enter LTL## in the Vehicle field.
Choose Save.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The optimization process flow in TP/VS
! The VS Optimizer
! Creating the Cost Profile
! Creating the VS Alert Profile
! Creating the Optimization Profile
! Interactive Planning
! Releasing and Publishing Planned Deliveries and
Shipments
Vehicle Scheduling (VS)
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the TP/VS optimization process
! Identify the objectives of the optimization
process
! Create cost, alert, and optimization profiles
! Perform an interactive optimization run
! Release shipments
! Publish delivery and shipment data
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The PC electronics manufacturer uses TP/VS to
plan inbound and outbound shipments.
! Before planning can begin, the cost and
optimization profiles must be created.
! To monitor various exception situations that can
occur during the planning and tendering process,
create an Alert Profile to report these exceptions.
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Optimization
Vehicle Scheduling)

" After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the
planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands is performed. This is called
the optimization process. It may be performed interactively or in background.
" Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling
determination in TP/VS.
" Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be
performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected.
" In order to transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or
R/3 System for execution. The process of publishing must be performed first.
" An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is
carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the
ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier,
in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using
various automated techniques.
" After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the
OLTP or R/3 System for execution. This step represents the final process in the Vehicle Scheduling
(VS) process flow.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transfer R/3 Sales
Order to APO
via CIF
OPTIMIZER
Create R/3
Sales Order
Create APO
Order
Allocate Vehicle
Resource,
Consolidate, Route
Opt., Scheduling
Allocate Carrier
Adjust / Optimize
Shipment
Release Shipment
Transfer Shipment
to R/3 via CIF
CS-Optimizer
Transactional Exchange relevant for Vehicle
Scheduling

" Sales orders are created in the R/3 System and then transferred to APO via the CIF.
" The transactions required are CFM1 for creating an integration model and CFM2 for activating and
deactivating the integration model.
" VS consists of a two-step optimization process:
1. Optimization on the basis of planning costs: Using an optimization and cost profile, the optimizer
decides what has to be transported by which method/vehicle, when it needs to be transported, and
over what transportation lane the shipment should be taken.
2. Carrier Selection: On the basis of a carrier selection profile, a carrier is assigned based on real
freight costs, business share, and/or priority.
" After the optimization processes have been completed, the shipments and related delivery documents
are published and transferred to the OLTP-R/3 System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
VS Optimizer: How does it work?
The problem of the Traveling Salesman consists in
the detection of the shortest way (or one of the
shortest ways), which connects a number of
locations a traveling salesman has to visit on a
sales tour.

" The Travelling Salesman Problem (TSP) belongs to a group of problems that cannot be solved
optimally in a reasonable time (NP-complete problems). The Vehicle Scheduling Problem in TP/VS
is a generalization of the TSP and is harder to solve. The algorithm uses search strategies to try and
find a good solution during the given runtime. Usually, the solution found is not necessarily optimal.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
VS Optimizer Process
Solution Runtime
Costs
Phase 1:
Greedy Search
First
Solution
Phase 2: Non-Improvement Moves

Vehicle Scheduling Optimization:
" What does it do?
$ The optimizer tries to assign freight units to vehicles and determine a goods delivery order for
each vehicle, so that total transportation costs are minimized.
$ It has to consider several constraints (vehicle capacity constraints, opening hours, and so on).
$ It has to take penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost.
" What the optimizer does not do:
$ Transportation chains with more than two reloading points; parallel chains
$ Handle resource optimization
$ Variable breaks (Resources or Vehicles)
$ Determination of shortest paths
$ Vehicle space optimization
" The Optimizer works on the basis of a step-by-step-search technique:
% First solution Generator:
Sorts/Inserts orders and deliveries according to vehicle constraints (resources)
% Local improvement:
Modifies the current solution (move) and accepts the modified solution, if cost criteria is met.
Phase 1: Greedy Search
Only cost improving moves are accepted
Phase 2: Non-Improvement-Moves
Frequent moves are penalized; non-improving moves are accepted
% Best solution found during runtime is returned.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Results of an optimization run
0.00E+00
5.00E+07
1.00E+08
1.50E+08
2.00E+08
2.50E+08
3.00E+08
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
1
0
0
:
0
0
:
1
9
0
:
0
0
:
3
7
0
:
0
1
:
1
5
0
:
0
2
:
0
2
0
:
0
3
:
0
8
0
:
1
1
:
2
5
0
:
1
5
:
0
3
0
:
1
7
:
3
8
0
:
2
1
:
4
3
0
:
2
5
:
2
5
0
:
2
6
:
2
6
0
:
3
2
:
1
6
0
:
4
4
:
0
6
0
:
4
6
:
4
3
0
:
4
9
:
3
5
0
:
5
1
:
5
7
1
:
0
0
:
5
5
1
:
0
3
:
1
1
1
:
0
9
:
2
6
1
:
1
5
:
3
2
1
:
2
1
:
4
3
Elapsed Run Time
C
O
S
T

" Duration of an optimization run depends on the following factors:
Number of sales orders and deliveries
Number of resources (Vehicle Resources and Handling Resources)
Constraints and costs: For an optimization run, different constraints are considered for planning.
There is a difference between hard and soft constraints:
- During an optimization run hard constraints cannot be exceeded. An example of a hard
constraint is the capacity of a vehicle resource.
- The Optimizer tries to observe soft constraints such as the requirement date of a sales order
item. Violation of soft constraints is possible and takes into account the penalties (for example,
early/late delivery).
Schedules (train, ship, and so on)
Number of depot locations (return trips for own vehicles)
Vehicle/location (in-)compatibility
Vehicle/Transportation Group (in-)compatibilities
Transportation Group/Transportation Group (in-)compatibilities
Maximum time a freight unit may be stored at a location (only relevant for cross-docking
locations)
Limits on distance, duration, and stopovers
Opening hours
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Constraints
Vehicle Capacity
Depot Location
Vehicle (In-)
Compatibibility
by Location
Vehicle
Type/Transport
Group (In-)
Compatibility
Transport
Group/Transport
Group (In-)
Compatibility
Maximum
Storage Time at
Location
Limits on Distance,
Duration, Stopovers
Schedules of
Vehicle Types
(Trains, Ships,
Aircraft, and
Trucks)
Handling Resources
Opening Hours of
Locations
Optimizer
Constraints

" Vehicle capacities are defined in the vehicle tab in the Resource master data.
" Vehicle (in-)compatibilities for Locations are defined in Location master data in the TP/VS tab.
" The maximum time a freight unit may be stored at a location is defined in the Location master
(TP/VS tab, Goods wait time). This constraint is used only in cross-docking scenarios.
" Load/Unload handling resources and opening hours are defined in the Resources tab of the Location
master:
Specify the resource used to load and unload a vehicle during a delivery process. You must also
define the resource consumption (in pieces), which are required for delivery (Docks, forklifts, and
so on) Each freight unit uses the same capacity, independent of its size; the capacity is used during
the load/unload time.
Opening hours are also defined in the Resources tab of the Location master. You have to indicate
the resource for which the opening times of this location are maintained. The break times of the
resource define when the location is not available.
You can either define load/unloading times or opening hours, but not both.
" Note: Picking lead time as well as transportation creation time which are defined in the TP/VS tab of
the location master are not relevant for the TP/VS optimizer.
$ picking lead time is the time required to make an order from the APO system available before the
material availability date of the OLTP system, so that picking can take place in the OLTP system
based on the corresponding deliveries.
$ Transportation creation time is the time required for the transportation documents to be transferred
from APO to the OLTP system, so that the appropriate shipment documents can be created before
loading begins.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-10
! SAP AG 2002
Costs in Optimization
GENERAL
GENERAL
LOCATION
LOCATION
SHIPMENT
SHIPMENT
TRANSPORTATION LANE
TRANSPORTATION LANE
C
O
S
T
P
R
O
F
I
L
E
DIMENSION
DIMENSION

" Costs are defined using a Cost Profile.
" Costs are not real costs, they are relative costs to be used by the optimizer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-11
! SAP AG 2002
Location-Related Costs
! Delay costs are the costs imposed as a penalty for delayed
delivery.
! Nondelivery costs are the costs imposed as a penalty for
nondelivery.
LOCATION
LOCATION

" Penalty costs are not actually a currency amount, but rather a theoretical value that is used by the
Optimizer to calculate the most favorable delivery date.
" The maintained delay costs refer to the units (time units) specified in the same row. This unit is
specified in days. Calculation of the penalty costs in the objective function are re-calculated in
seconds.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-12
! SAP AG 2002
Penalty Costs: Delayed Delivery and Non-Delivery
Costs
COST PROFILE
CUSTOMER LOCATION MASTER

" Delay and non-delivery costs can be defined location dependent. For each location, a certain priority
can be defined, and for each priority different penalty costs can be specified.
" Note: The TP/VS optimizer does not use the delay/non-delivery costs which are defined in the
Location Product master. Those costs are only used by SNP.
" Note: The penalty costs are maintained on a daily basis. Calculation of the penalty costs in the
objective function are recalculated in seconds.
" The priority in the General tab of the location master data corresponds to the priority on the
Location tab in Cost profile. Orders for locations with a certain priority receive the appropriate
penalty costs for non-delivery or delayed delivery. This priority is taken into account if you maintain
a delivery priority in your order.
" Enter the value one for the highest priority. The higher the number entered, the lower the priority.
" If you do not enter a value, the system automatically assigns the value zero, giving the location the
highest priority.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-13
! SAP AG 2002
Shipment-Related Costs
! Fixed transportation costs are the one-off costs incurred
by using the vehicle(s) in question irrespective of the
actual transportation criteria (carrier, distance, and so on).
SHIPMENT
SHIPMENT

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-14
! SAP AG 2002
Dimension-Related Costs
! Here you maintain the variable costs of a shipment
DIMENSION
DIMENSION

" Cost dimension is the dimension on which the transportation costs and cost unit are based. You also
have to maintain the Cost Unit.
$ Quantity costs per unit and distance
$ Distance costs per distance unit (e.g. km)
$ Duration costs per time unit (e.g. day)
$ Stopovers costs per additional stop
$ Definition of maximum distance/duration/number of stopovers
" Example 1: Variable transportation costs Distance related
Cost dimension Transportation cost Cost unit
distance 50.00 KM => costs of 50.00 per KM
Note: The dimension quantity is related to the transported quantity per KM
" Example 2: Variable transportation costs Weight and distance related:
Cost dimension transportation costs Cost unit
quantity 2.00 KG => transportation costs of 2.00 per KG per KM.
If the transportation route has a distance of 100 km, then the costs for 30 KG are calculated as
2.00 x 30 KG x 100 KM = 6,000. For 200 km, we would have costs of 12,000.
" Instead of the variable costs defined in the Dimensions tab of the Cost profile, you may also use the
costs from the tab Transportation Lane.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-15
! SAP AG 2002
Stopovers, used in Cost Profile
Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 3
Loc. A Loc. B Loc. C Loc. D
Stopover 1 Stopover 2
+ 1

" Number of stopovers: Depot Customer A Customer B Customer C => 2 stopovers (source
and target location in a route are not taken into account for calculating the number of stopovers).
" You have to maintain the number of stopovers + 1 (you have to maintain the number of lanes).

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-16
! SAP AG 2002
Costs for Transportation Lane
! If you want to plan on basis of costs maintained for special
lanes, define on the dimension tab that costs from the
transportation lane tab should be chosen.
TRANSPORTATION LANE
TRANSPORTATION LANE

" You have to maintain transportation costs for the unit of measure on which the specified product
transportation costs are based (means what unit of measure you have maintained on the dimension
tab).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-17
! SAP AG 2002
Vehicle Scheduling Alert Profile

" Vehicle Scheduling Alert Profile is created in the Alert Monitor.
" The following are alert types that can be selected for inclusion in a VS Alert Profile:
$ Alerts that are generated during the optimization run:
- Check availability; Order due date changed by VS
- Order not planned in Transportation Planning
- Handling or transportation resource overload
- No shipment generated by optimizer
$ Alerts that can be generated during carrier selection or tendering:
- No carrier found
- Proposed delivery date changed by external carrier
- Proposed shipment declined by external carrier
- Proposed delivery date already in execution changed by external carrier
- Proposed shipment already in execution declined by external carrier
" The Alert Profile is entered in the Optimization Profile.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-18
! SAP AG 2002
! Planning Data
" Planning Version and Model
" Depot Selection
" Transfer Requirements (Sales
orders, Deliveries, Stock
Transport Orders
and so on)
" Planning Horizon
& Offset
& Offset End
Optimization Profile (1)

" There are three tabs to maintain settings for the optimization profile:
$ Planning Data
$ General Settings
$ Automatic Shipment Creation
" In the Planning tab, the parameters include:
$ Version: the planning version to be used during Interactive Planning.
$ Depot Selection/With No Depot Locations
- Refers to resources that have not been assigned to a depot location. Resources can be assigned
to specific locations. Choose With no depot locations when you want to select all resources that
are not assigned to a depot location.
- A depot location can be a production plant, distribution center, supplier, carrier, or MRP area.
" Transfer Requirements define the demand horizon, the demand categories, source, and target
locations.
" The Planning Horizon defines the period within which shipments should be planned.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-19
! SAP AG 2002
Planning Horizon
today
Start of
Planning Horizon
Latest Requested
Delivery Date
End of Planning
Horizon
10 Days 9 Days
50 Days
Offset
End of Offset
Planning Horizon
= Sales Order
= Material Availability Date
= Requested Delivery Date

" Offset in days:
$ Starting from current date, defines the period (in days) after which the planning horizon should
commence.
$ The planning horizon commences after this period has elapsed. You can also maintain the offset
duration to the exact hour and minute. This can result in either of the following:
- Time-dependent: If offset (in days) is set to zero, the planning horizon commences from the
current time, after the offset duration has elapsed (in hours and minutes).
- Time-independent: If offset is set to one or higher, the planning horizon commences after the
offset in days plus the maintained offset (in hours and minutes) from 0:00h.
$ If you want to specify the offset more precisely, specify it in hours and minutes via Offset
Duration.
- Example:
Time dependent: Offset in Days=zero Offset Dur=3:00 means after three hours from current
time
Time independent: Offset in Days=one Offset Dur=7:00 means after one day and seven hours,
(the seven hours are counted after the end of the first day, from 0:00 am the next day)
" Note: A day is defined as being 0:00h until 23:59h and the time refers to the local time zone of user
" End of Offset
$ Indicates a time span in days. For example, if you enter three, there is a period of three days after
the latest required delivery date during which the order can be executed. If you enter a zero, the
order must be executed on the latest delivery date.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-20
! SAP AG 2002
! Transfer Requirement
" Demand Horizon
" Demand Category
" Source Locations
" Target Locations

" The Transfer requirements screen is accessed by selecting Multiple selection in the Transfer
Requirements box on the Planning Data tab of the Optimization Profile screen.
" The tabs located in the Transfer Requirement screen are used to:
$ Define the time period that will be used to select the requirements (Sales Orders, Deliveries, Stock
Transport Orders, and so on)
$ Select the documents to be planned (the requirements).
$ Select the Source Locations to limit the selection of the outbound requirements.
$ Select the Target Locations to limit the selection of the inbound requirements.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-21
! SAP AG 2002
Demand Horizon
.
= Sales Order
= Material Availability Date
= Requested Delivery Date
today
Start of
Demand Horizon
End of
Demand Horizon
Offset
Demand Horizon
= Duration
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 Days
Sales Order is not included
in defined Demand Horizon
if the selection is made by
Requested Delivery Date.
50 Days

" The Demand Horizon defines which sales orders should be planned.
" The Offset in the Relative Horizon defines the period (in days, beginning at the current date) after
which the demand horizon is to begin. This number can be either positive (if the offset time frame
falls in the future) or negative (if the offset began in the past). The Offset is used when a concrete
start and end date or start and end time for a horizon cannot be set.
$ Example
- If an Offset of seven is defined, the selection of material availability/requested delivery dates
for the orders begins eight days after today.
" The Duration in the Relative Horizon is used as follows:
$ Start of demand horizon: Current date + Offset
$ End of demand horizon: Current date + Offset + Duration.
$ For example, all orders that have their material availability/requested delivery date within this
horizon should be selected.
" The Selection MaAvailDat selection box controls if order selection is executed according to the
material availability date (indicator set) or according to the requested delivery date (indicator not
set).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-22
! SAP AG 2002
Demand Categories

" The Demand category controls which requirements categories are included during Interactive
Planning. The categories can be combined with each other (for example, a combined
outbound/replenishment scenario). However, disconnected relationships do not work. For example,
an inbound/outbound combination. Customer-designed ATP categories can be used to enhance these
categories.
" The following lists identify the various order categories by transportation requirement.
$ Inbound:
- AH Purchase order memo
- BF Order item schedule line
- BV Line in a scheduling agreement
$ Stock transports:
- (AH) Purchase order memo (only if necessary)
- BF Order item schedule line
- BI Stock transport order
- BR Delivery
- (EI) TLB: Purchase requisition (only if necessary)
- (IT) VMI delivery (only if necessary)
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-23
$ Outbound:
- BM Sales order
- BQ Delivery free of charge
- BR Delivery
- BT Returns delivery
$ TLB:
- EI TLB: Purchase requisition
- EK TLB: VMI order
- EQ Replenishment delivery
- ER VMI delivery
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-24
! SAP AG 2002
! General Settings
" Cost Profile
" Runtime for the Optimizer in seconds
" Vehicle Scheduling Alert-Profile

" Assign your cost and alert profile to the optimization profile on this tab.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-25
! SAP AG 2002
! Automatic Shipment Generation
(for Parcel or TLB orders)
" Defines which deliveries are excluded from VS
(for example, Parcel)
" Deliveries up to the upper limit are transported with the
specified resource
" Deliveries over the lower limit
are transported with another
specified transportation mode
(for example, FTL)
" Category Selection

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-26
! SAP AG 2002
Vehicle Scheduling Consistency Check

" After modeling your Supply Chain and finishing IMG-Activities, run the report /SAPAPO/VSCC.
Use the transaction /SAPAPO/VSCC.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-27
! SAP AG 2002
Features Multi-Frame/Multi-View Design
Resource, Shipments, and
Order Overview
Shipment Assigned
Orders
Unassigned Orders
for Consolidation
Planned Shipments
Interactive Planning (1)

Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. The
Vehicle Scheduling Selection screen appears. Select an optimization profile.
" If a large number of resources or locations have been maintained, it may make sense to use resource
selection. The selected settings are saved as variants. Choose Execute to get into the interactive
vehicle scheduling planning.
" A selection area (shuffler) on the left side of the screen displays three different views (resources,
shipments, and orders) in which a planning object can be selected
" Tabular planning on the right side of the screen covers the three different planning tables, or online
scheduling, which contains information on all shipment activities in graphical form (a different
display of tabular planning).
" Tabular planning consists of three tables:
$ Transport. activities
All transportation activities (shipment assignments/itineraries) for the orders assigned to the
planning object are displayed. The transportation number, the start, finish, and gross/net duration
of the transportation activities are displayed.
$ Assigned/unplanned orders
All of the (scheduled) orders assigned to the planning object in the planning horizon are displayed
in the upper table.
$ All of the orders that are not scheduled or are to be scheduled are displayed in the lower table if
they were selected according to the criteria defined in the optimization profile for order selection
(selection horizon, source locations, and order categories) and are relevant for planning in the
current planning run.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-28
! SAP AG 2002
! Resource view
" All vehicle resources are displayed which:
& Are not assigned to a depot location
& Are assigned to one of the selected depot locations
! Shipment view
" All shipments that have at least one shipment activity
completely or partially within the planning horizon are
displayed
" Is used to change, reschedule, or delete shipments that
are already scheduled
! Order view
" All shipment-related data for individual orders are
displayed
" Is used to display the itinerary of the individual orders
Interactive Planning (2)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-29
! SAP AG 2002
Create a shipment manually
1.
2.
3.

" You are in the maintenance view for interactive vehicle scheduling: Vehicle Scheduling Resource.
Double-click a resource in the left area of the screen. The screen name displays the resource
description.
" In tabular planning, go to the right screen area when you can move orders from the planning table
Not yet scheduled/to be scheduled to the planning table Assigned/unplanned shipments. Use Drag &
Drop to do this, or choose Assign order.
" To remove an order from the table, choose Remove order.
" The Transportation Scheduling Specifications for Scheduling screen appears (see next page). Here
you maintain:
$ Loading and unloading durations
$ Sequence of the stops
$ Transportation duration
$ Arrival or departure date and time
The default values for the loading duration are determined in Transportation and Shipping
Scheduling. A default value is also generated for the itinerary determined by the drive to all source
locations and to all target locations. The sequence of the stops is determined by setting the stopoff
sequence. The transport duration is read from the transportation relationships. They can be adjusted
if necessary. At least one date must be entered for each shipment (usually the arrival time at the last
target location). After you confirm, a shipment is created as long as there is a possible date for the
execution of the shipment in the planning horizon, and the resource selected has enough capacity.
" Confirm your entries with Enter. In the Transportation activities planning table and the upper
planning table of Assigned/unplanned shipment units, a line is added with the corresponding
information.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-30
! SAP AG 2002
Create Shipments Manually

" While you plan manually, the following restrictions apply:
$ Vehicle resource capacities (as long as the resources are planned finitely)
$ Resource time streams (including resource breaks, shifts, and unscheduled breaks)
$ Loading and unloading resources at locations (including capacities and time streams)
$ Opening times
$ Trips to and from depot location (for own means of transport)
$ Empty running distance
$ Desired dates for arrival and departure
$ Planning horizon

" If the vehicle is assigned to a transportation vehicle that is not suitable for schedules and a shipment
is created, this vehicle resource is not available for other shipments for the duration of the shipment,
regardless of any remaining capacity.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-31
! SAP AG 2002
or
! Optimizing in the Background
! Interactive Optimization
VS Optimization Run

" Interactive Optimization
$ From the interactive vehicle scheduling Vehicle Scheduling Resource screen, select VS Optimizer.
" Optimizing in the Background
$ Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Planning Planning in the
Background
Schedule Optimization Run.
$ Enter a job name.
$ Choose an optimization profile.
$ Choose Enter. The Start Times screen appears.
$ Specify a date for background optimization.
$ Choose Save. The screen closes and the message Background job was successfully scheduled
appears in the message bar.
" The Optimization is carried out in the background at the time you selected.
" If the optimization run finishes without any problems or messages being displayed, the Optimizer
does not create any transports. Reasons for this include:
$ Non-delivery costs are so low, the Optimizer determines that non-delivery is cheaper than the
transport of the order.
$ Transportation lanes are missed.
$ Total time of transport activities, including work breaks, is too long for the planning horizon.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-32
! SAP AG 2002
Optimization Logfile

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-33
! SAP AG 2002
History of Optimization Runs

" To get documentation of the Optimizer actions during an Optimization run, use Transaction
/SAPAPO/OPT11.
" For analysis and error handling set the Dump Level to 1 in /SAPAPO/OPT10. In transaction
/SAPAPO/OPT11 you can see if input and/or output data is written.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-34
! SAP AG 2002
Changing Shipments
1.
2.
3.

" Reschedule on the Vehicle Scheduling Shipments screen. Select a shipment (by double-clicking a
shipment in the left screen area) and choose Reschedule shipment on the Transportation activities
tab.
" If additional orders are added to a shipment in the transportation view, the whole shipment is
rescheduled. You can do this until the shipment has been released.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-35
! SAP AG 2002
Deleting Shipments

" Delete a shipment in the left screen area of the Vehicle Scheduling Shipments screen by double-
clicking the shipment, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Delete shipment.
" If you deallocate all of the orders assigned to a shipment, the shipment is also deleted. If an order is
assigned to a shipment to be deleted as well as to other shipments, it is deallocated from all
shipments. You can do this until the shipment has been released.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-36
! SAP AG 2002
Featuring Graphical Drop&Drag for Scheduling
Transportation Activities and Resources
On-Line Scheduling View

Online scheduling:
" In the Transportation activities chart, the orders are displayed with their transportation activities on
a time axis. This time axis corresponds to the planning horizon defined in the optimization profile.
The activities load, transport, and unload are displayed in the form of bars, each in a different color.
These bars cover the start and finish of activities.
" In the Resources chart, all of the resources involved in the shipments are displayed. This includes all
of the vehicle resources, handling resources, and opening time resources. Resource breaks are
displayed in gray.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-37
! SAP AG 2002
Resource Utilization View

" You can maintain a planning table which shows your resources and their used capacities in the
customizing of PP/DS. Choose: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Supply Chain Planning
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) Product Planning Table Detailed
Planning Board in the Product Planning Board Maintain DS Planning Board Profiles.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-38
! SAP AG 2002
Maintenance of Resource Utilization View

" The standard profile for TP/VS is SAP004. Never change this profile. Copy it to a user specific copy
and enter your user name to the field Customizing ID.
" Mark your planning table profile and select Chart on the left side. You will see two charts: one
Transportation activity and two Resources. To add a resource utilization view press New entries. In
the upcoming screen enter a name on top; the chart number is three.
" Select in the next step the chart object one (Resource). In the field Displayed objects select Resource
load, go to Histogram data (last tab at the bottom) and maintain the look of the diagram.
" Go to Interactive Planning Board (/SAPAPO/VS01) and select Overview Plan Board. There you will
now also see the capacity of your resources.
" For a more detailed view you also can choose on the application side in Production Planning
Interactive Production Planning Detailed Scheduling Planning Board Variable. View the tab
Planning Board. Put in your profile and choose Execute.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-39
! SAP AG 2002
Features Interactive View of Alert Monitor
Exception Management

" View the alerts in the Alert Monitor window (Alert Monitor Display alerts)
" Take action on alerts in the Alert Monitor window (access context menu with right mouse click).
" There are three possible priority levels:
$ Error
$ Warning
$ Information
" Alert types are automatically assigned certain priority levels, but you can change the priority level of
an alert in APO Customizing.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-40
! SAP AG 2002
Set up Alerts for TP/VS

" Maintain an alert profile if you want to track Vehicle Scheduling alerts in APO. The profile allows
you to maintain a user-specific selection of alerts corresponding to your area of responsibility.
" To set up Alerts for TP/VS choose APO Menu: Supply Chain Monitoring Current Settings Set
Alert Monitor or choose transaction code /SAPAPO/AMON_SETTING.
" Determine planning version and time frame for alert selection in initial settings screen. If no version
is defined, the system considers the version of the VS optimization profile
" Select Maintain profile, name your alert profile and choose the alerts you want to achieve. You also
have to assign the relevant optimization profile. Save and go back.
" Assign your alert profile to the version-dependent alert selection. Save.
" Note: Keep alerts to a minimum. Too many alerts slow performance
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-41
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Carrier Tendering
Release Shipments
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Optimization
Vehicle Scheduling)
Publishing

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-42
! SAP AG 2002
Releasing Shipments

" Before each optimization run, all (fixed) shipments that are not yet released are deallocated. The
optimizer reschedules the orders. For an order to be fixed, it must be released (published).
" When a shipment is released:
$ Planning result is accepted as final
$ Shipment is prepared for transfer to the OLTP system
$ Published shipment is not deallocated before an optimization run
$ Optimizer considers its resource load as a starting solution
" Process Flow:
$ Vehicle Scheduling Shipments view. To release orders, select one or more shipments in the left
area of the screen by double-clicking them.
$ Choose Release shipment.
$ Note: After you release the shipments, you cannot make any changes to them in the APO System.
There is one exception, if you use manual Carrier Selection, you are able to choose or change your
carrier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-43
! SAP AG 2002
Publishing
(Live Cache)
VS-Communication
Layer
Tendering on
Planned Shipments
EDI
XML
WEB
Communication Layer
Orders Orders
Deliveries Deliveries
Shipments Shipments

" Executable function releasing planned shipments from APO into the Communication Layer

" The VS-Communication Layer is a collection of database tables which store detailed
order/delivery/shipment information.

" Shipments are given a firm status and made available for tendering
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-44
! SAP AG 2002
! Data can be transferred interactively to
" obtain an overview of the documents to be transferred
" make changes to the due date horizon of the document
transfer
" earlier transfer of individual documents
Publishing Shipments

" You have made the required settings in Customizing:
$ Maintain the Basis Settings in the activities for Publication.
$ Maintain the settings for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) under Interfaces.
" In the APO menu, choose Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment OLTP
Interface and then choose, one after the other, the following activities:
$ Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation
$ Check Release of Planned Shipments
$ Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP System
" Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation
$ The Selection of orders to be transferred dialog box appears in which you specify the due date
horizon for which you want to display planned orders. A list of the predecessor documents then
appears (orders, purchase requisitions, and so on). You can confirm them or postpone transferring
them.
$ Choose Execute. The Display logs screen appears containing information on the current user of the
log and an list of the orders that are currently being transferred.
" Check Release of Planned Shipments
$ An overview of the released planned shipments appears. This step is important to make sure that
all predecessor documents (for example, sales orders) have been converted to deliveries, since this
is a prerequisite for creating a shipment.
" Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP System
$ The Selection of shipments to be transferred dialog box appears in which you specify the due date
horizon for which you want to display planned shipments. A list of these shipments then appears.
You can confirm them or choose them for earlier transfer.
$ Choose Execute. The Display logs screen appears containing information on the current user of the
log and an list of the shipments that are currently being transferred.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-45
! SAP AG 2002
Orders
Outbound
Shipment
Planned Shipments
Sales Orders,
Deliveries,
and so on
APO -
Middleware
(CIF)
R/3 Plug-In
(CIF)
Creates
Optimization
Load Consolidation
Vehicle Scheduling
- Subscribe
- Key Selection
- Det. Dest. Sys
- Mapping
- Call BAPI
Orders
Shipment Program (Outbound Process)

" There is an executable for Releasing/Creating Shipments in the Execution System
" Uses APO Middleware to transfer or execute a create via CIF in real-time mode.
" For sales orders that are planned, the planned deliveries and shipments are reflected in the document
flow of the orders.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-46
! SAP AG 2002
Orders
Orders
Shipments Shipments
update
manual
changes
update
APO -
Middleware
(CIF)
R/3 Plug-In
(CIF)
update
manual
changes
Shipment Change Process

" Any planning-relevant change to an order will invalidate the shipment in APO. If the shipment
consists of only the order that is changed, it will be deleted. If other orders exist in the shipment, the
status of the shipment will be changed.
" Orders, deliveries and shipments must be changed in the OLTP System (R/3 System). Planning
relevant changes will be updated in the APO system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-47
! SAP AG 2002
End Shipments

" By setting the flag Shipment end in OLTP R/3 System, the shipment in APO is no longer relevant
for planning. A deletion indicator for those shipments is set.
" If a shipment has been deleted in the OLTP System, the shipment in APO will also be deleted.
" Those shipments and their deliveries for which a deletion indicator has also been set are deleted.
" To delete those shipments choose in APO Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
Planning Delete Shipments. The Display logs screen appears. Along with the general information
on the user of this activity, a list of shipments that are due appears. Data on this screen can only be
displayed. Choose Back to exit this screen.
" A deletion indicator is set for the delivery if you post goods issue or goods receipt. To delete those
deliveries choose in APO Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Delete
Deliveries. The Display logs screen appears.
" A deletion indicator is also set for a delivery, if:
$ The delivery has been deleted in the OLTP System
$ The delivery has been posted as a goods issue in the OLTP System and is not assigned to a
shipment anymore
$ The shipment has been deleted in the OLTP System
" To delete the delivery, choose in the APO menu: Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
Planning Delete Deliveries. The Display logs screen appears. Along with the general information
on the user of this activity, a list of deliveries that are due appears. Data on this screen can only be
displayed. Choose Back to exit this screen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-48
! SAP AG 2002
Archiving Deliveries
To maintain the Archiving Settings
choose in R/3 Customizing:
Logistics Execution Archiving

" From time to time, inbound and outbound deliveries that are no longer required in the system can be
archived. To execute this function, use the archiving object RV_LIKP. This writes the deliveries to
an archive file and then deletes them from the database.
" Central archiving is set up, executed, and managed using transaction SARA.
" During the archiving run, the deliveries are checked on the basis of different criteria as to whether
they can actually be archived. These checks include (excerpt):
$ Total status of the delivery is complete
$ Delivery has reached the residence time (residence time in the system)
$ The shipment to which the delivery belongs is complete
" You can determine the residence time yourself on the basis of the sales organization and the delivery
type. As a rule, all the other checks cannot be changed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-49
! SAP AG 2002
Archiving Shipments
To maintain the Archiving Settings
choose in R/3 Customizing:
Logistics Execution Archiving

" The archiving program checks several criteria for each shipment. A shipment can be archived if the
following conditions are met:
$ The creation date of the shipment must be at least N days in the past.
$ The last change date fo the shipment must be at least M days in the past.
$ The overall status of the shipment must be at least X. You set X in archiving control for
transportation (column: Minimum overall status).
$ All deliveries in the shipment must have transportation planning status C (fully planned).
$ All deliveries in the shipment must have goods movement status ' ' (not relevant) or C (fully
processed ).
$ The shipment must have the overall shipment costs calculation status ' ' (not relevant) or C
(completely processed).
$ If the overall shipment costs calculation status of the shipment is C (completely processed), the
relevant shipment cost document must already have been archived. This means that is must no
longer exist in the system. During archiving, the document flow must be processed starting with
the last document in the list.
$ All shipments that are included in a transportation chain with the shipment currently being
processed must also be fully relevant for archiving. This means, these shipments must also meet
preconditions 1-5 and fall within the shipment number range you specified when you started
archiving.
" The last five criteria are always checked in the program and cannot be altered. The first three criteria,
however, can be set in Customizing (archiving control for transportation).

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-50
! SAP AG 2002
Create Job Schedule Job
Job Job
Profile Profile
Date Date
Sequence:
Job, Event, or
operation
Sequence:
Job, Event, or
operation
12
9
6
3
11 1
7 5
8 4
2 10
Mass Processing Capabilities
Optimization
Carrier Selection
Create/Delete Deliveries
Create/Delete Shipments
Available Functions for Mass Processing

" The above sequence depicts the steps you perform to carry out mass processing.
" You can carry out several planning actions within one job as long as they have the same activity. For
example, you might run a mass processing job that executes several macros at the same time, or a job
that carries out a VS optimization, carrier selection then publishing of the data to the R/3 (OLTP)
System.
" The sequence in which actions within one activity are processed depends on the sequential numbers
you define for them in the activity.
" The system performs all actions for the first characteristic value before processing the second
characteristic value. Consequently, if you want the system to perform one action for all
characteristic values before it starts the next action, you must define separate planning activities.
" For each job, define the selection of data which should be considered in the processing of the job as
well as the level to which it should be aggregated before the actions are executed.
" Planning jobs are reusable.
" See: APO SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment OLTP
Interface Mass Processing Interface.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-51
! SAP AG 2002
! Job Log Available
" Date/Time of job
" Status: red, yellow, green
" Characteristic combinations
processed
Mass Processing Job Log

" The system can nowcreate a log of a mass processing job. Set an indicator on the job creation screen.
The job log shows:
$ Name of the job
$ Date and time which the job started
$ Whether the job completed successfully (green), with warnings (yellow) or with errors (red)
$ A message relating to every characteristic value combination that was processed in the job along
with long text
$ You can also use the following functions:
- Show/hide all characteristic value combinations that completed successfully/with warnings/with
errors
- Sort and filter according to characteristic value combination or message text
- Print, download, or send the current view of the log
- Define display variants for the log
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-52
! SAP AG 2002
! Describe the TP/VS optimization process
! Identify the objectives of the optimization
process
! Create cost, alert, and optimization profiles
! Perform an interactive optimization run
! Release shipments
! Publish delivery and shipment data
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Interactive Planning: Unit
Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-53
Exercises

Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS)
Topic: Interactive Planning

Create a Cost Profile to be used in VS Optimization
Create a TP/VS Alert Profile to monitor exception events in
planning
Create an Optimization Profile for use with the VS Optimizer
Perform an interactive planning run and evaluate the results
Release shipments
Publish delivery and shipment data to the R/3 System.

As a member of the TP/VS implementation team, you are
responsible for setting up the required profiles necessary to begin
planning of transportation shipments using TP/VS. You are
required to establish cost profiles that the optimizer will use in
evaluating cost constraints related to various methods of
transportation. To monitor the process for various exception
situations, you will also create a VS Alert Profile that will be
assigned to your optimization profile. As the last step before the
interactive planning can begin, you must create the Optimization
Profiles, that, will select the documents for planning. After the
planning process has been completed, you will transfer the
delivery and shipment data to the R/3 System using the
publishing process.

1-1 For Model 000 create cost profiles for: general costs, location costs, shipment costs,
and dimension costs as follows:
Model: 000
General Costs:
New Profile Name: GRP##
Earliness Cost: 250.00
Location:
Priority: 1
Delay Cost: 2000.000
Non-Delivery Cost: 1,000,000.000

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-54
Priority: 2
Delay Cost: 1000.000
Non-Delivery Cost: 500,000.000
Shipment:
Transport.Method: FTL##
Fixed Trans. Cost: 50.000

Transport.Method: LTL##
Fixed Trans. Cost: 40.000
Dimension:
Transport.Method: FTL##
Cost Dimension: E Distance
Transp.Costs: 1.00
Cost Unit: KM
Transportation Max.: leave blank
Cost Basis: 0 Dimension

Transport.Method: LTL##
Cost Dimension: E Distance
Transp.Costs: .50
Cost Unit: KM
Transportation Max.: leave blank
Cost Basis: 0 Dimension
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-55
1-2 Create an Alert Profile in the Alert Monitor:
VehSched alert profile: VSAP-##
Description: VS Alert Profile Gr. ##
Check the following alerts:
Check Availability. Order due date changed by Vehicle Scheduling
Order not planned in Transportation Planning
No Carrier Found
Handling or transportation resource overloaded
Optimizer: No transport created
Choose Save.
1-3 Create an optimization profile for inbound shipments:
Optimization Profile: OPIN-##
Description: Inbound Shipments Gr. 18
Planning Data tab:
Planning Version: 000
With no depot locations
Transfer Requirement:
Fixed Horizon:
Start date: leave blank
Start time: 00:00:00
End date: leave blank
End time: 23:59:00
Demand Categories: AH, BF,BI, BR, BV
Target Locations: 10##, 22##
Choose Back.
General Technical Settings:
Cost Profile: GRP##
Runtime Optimization: 60
Vehicle Scheduling alert profile: VSAP-##
Autom. Shipment Generation: None
Choose Save.
1-4 Run the Consistency Check on your inbound profile. If there are any errors you
should correct the errors before proceeding.
Transaction: /n/SAPAPO/VSCC
1-5 Create an Optimization Profile for outbound shipments:
Optimization Profile: OPOUT-##
Description: Outbound Shipments Gr. 18
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-56
Planning Data tab:
With no depot locations
Transfer Requirement:
Fixed Horizon:
Start date: leave blank
Start time: 00:00:00
End date: leave blank
End time: 23:59:00
Demand Categories: BM,BQ,BR,BX,EQ
Source Locations: 10##, 12##, 22##, 25##
Choose Back.
General Technical Settings:
Cost Profile: GRP##
Runtime Optimization: 60
Autom. Shipment Generation: No Settings Required
Choose Save.
1-6 Run the Consistency Check on your outbound profile. If there are any errors you
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-57
1-7 Create an optimization variant and conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling run for
inbound shipments:
1-7-1 Create a variant for the Vehicle Scheduling Selection screen after you have
entered your optimization profile.
Enter the following:
Optimization profile: OPIN-##
Select Enter.
Selection period:
Enter Start date: Today's Date
End date: Today's Date + 4 Wks
Resource: Use Multiple Selection to enter your resources,
G##-FTRK01 G##-FTRK05
G##-LTRK01 G##-LTRK05
Choose Save to create the variant.
Enter the Variant Name: OPIN-##
Enter the Variant description: OPIN-##.
Choose Save.
1-7-2 Initiate the optimization process and review the data that is displayed on the
Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the unassigned Freight units.
Answer the following questions:
How many unassigned Freight units are there? ______
How many resources are available? _______
How many assigned/Unplanned Freight units? ______
How many shipments were created ? _______
Run the VS OPtimizer.
How many assigned/unplanned Freight units? ______
Check the Alert Monitor:
How many alerts were displayed ? ________
Save the session.
1-8 Create an optimization variant and conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling run for
outbound shipments:
1-8-1 Create a variant for the Vehicle Scheduling Selection screen after you have
entered your optimization profile.
Enter the following:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-58
Optimization profile: OPOUT-##
Select Enter.
Selection period:
Enter Start date: Today's Date
End date: Today's Date + 4 Wks
Resource: Use Multiple Selection to enter your resources,
G##-FTRK01 G##-FTRK05
G##-LTRK01 G##-LTRK05
Choose Save to create the variant.
Enter the Variant Name: OPOUT-##
Enter the Variant description: OPOUT-##.
Choose Save.
1-8-2 Initiate the optimization process and review the data that is displayed on the
Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the unassigned Freight units.
How many assigned/unplanned Freight units? ______
1-8-3 Create a planned and release a shipment manually from the sales order with
only one line item. Use an LTL resource.
1-8-4 Run the VS Optimizer.
How many assigned/Unplanned Freight units? ______
Check the Alert Monitor:
How many alerts were displayed ? _______
Save the session.
1-8-5 Release the planned shipments.
Shipment document number: _______________________
1-8-6 Perform Manual Carrier Assignment for the shipments. Assign carrier
0000001058 to each shipment.
1-8-7 Choose Save.
1-8-8 Transfer the delivery data to the R/3 System using the publishing process.
1-8-9 Check the release status of all shipment documents.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-59
1-8-10 Transfer the shipment data for your shipments to the R/3 System.
1-8-11 View the delivery and shipment documents in the R/3 System for one of the
sales orders.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-60
Exercises

Topic: Using Transportation Zone Hierarchies

Understand the customizing settings and master data
requirements necessary to use transportation zone hierarchies
in shipment planning.

Due to the large customer base in your PC electronics company,
you must reduce the number of transportation lanes required to
plan shipments. To accomplish this and to provide a more
accurate cost optimization, you will use the transportation zone
hierarchy function.
2-1 Although a transportation zone hierarchy has already been established,
TZONE, you will review the pertinent customizing settings:
2-1-1 First, look at the hierarchy structure definition table. In this table the
TZONE hierarchy is defined as a Location hierarchy with two levels
(two is the standard and cannot be exceeded.).
2-1-2 The second customizing table is definition of the hierarchy itself and the
link to the structure defined in the first table. There are some text fields
defined here as well.
2-1-3 The third relevant table is the Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy
table. In this table, you assign your transportation zone hierarchy to the VS
application.
2-1-4 The transportation zone hierarchy should be created before any customer
location data is transferred to APO. When the hierarchy is created first, the
system will automatically update the hierarchy with the transportation zones
and associated customer locations. To see your customers in the
transportation zone hierarchy go to the Hierarchy master data table, verify
that your customers are in transportation zones DE-D000060000, DE-
D000070000 or DE-D000080000.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-61

2-1-5 To test the use of Transportation Zone Hierarchies:
Create four sales orders: Sales Document Type: OR
Sold-to: T-S11A##
P.O.Number: 12-1-##
Requested Del. Date: Today + 3 weeks
Material and Qty: T-ATD2-## 50 PC
Document Number: _______________________

Sold-to: T-S22A##
P.O.Number: 12-2-##
T-ATD3-## 50 PC
Document Number: _______________________

Sold-to: T-S33A##
P.O.Number: 12-3-##
Requested Del. Date: Today + 3 weeks + 1 day
T-ATD3-## 50 PC
Document Number: _______________________

Sold-to: T-S33A##
P.O.Number: 12-4-##
T-ATD3-## 50 PC
Document Number: _______________________
Use your optimizing profile OPOUT-## to plan the shipments and save the
planned data but document the following:
How many shipments were created? ____________________
What were the optimized costs? ____________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-62
2-1-6 To use the transportation zone hierarchy in planning, a transportation lane
must exist between the source plants/DCs and the transportation zones. In
addition, a circular transportation lane must exist in which the source and
target locations are the transportation zone. In this exercise, you will check
transportation zone DE-D000060000 for the circular relationship and add
your Transportation Methods to the lane (FTL## and LTL##).
2-1-7 Check that a lane exists between your plant 12## and transportation zone
DE-D000060000. If not, create it.
2-18-8 Go back to Interactive planning and re-run the VS OPtimizer and document
the following:
How many shipments were created? _____________________
What was the total optimized costs? _____________________
2-1-9 Save your data.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-63
Solutions

Topic: Interactive Planning
1-1 For Model 000, create cost profiles for: general costs, location costs, shipment costs
and dimension costs as follows:
APO SAP Menu Master Data Master Data for Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling /SAPAPO/CTRP - Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs
Model name: 000
Select Change.
General costs tab:
Select Add rows.
Add a row:
Cost profile: GR##
Earliness cost: 250.000
Select the Location costs tab:
Select Add rows.
Add two rows:
Cost profile: GR##
Priority: 1
Delay costs: 2000.000
Nondelivery costs: 1,000,000.000
Cost profile: GR##
Priority: 2
Delay costs: 1000.000
Nondelivery costs:500,000.000
Select the Shipment tab:
Select Add rows.
Add two rows:
Cost profile: GR##
TransportMethod: FTL18
Fixed transp.costs: 50.000
Cost profile: GR##
TransportMethod: LTL18
Fixed transp. costs: 40.000
Select the Dimension tab:
Select Add rows:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-64
Cost profile: GR##
TransportMethod: FTL18
Cost dimension: E Distance
Transportation costs: 1.000
Cost unit: KM
Transportation Max: Leave blank
Cost basis: 0 - Dimension
Cost profile: GR##
TransportMethod: LTL18
Cost dimension: E Distance
Transportation costs: 1.000
Cost unit: KM
Transportation Max: Leave blank
Cost basis: 0 Dimension
Choose Save.
1-2 Create an Alert Profile:
APO SAP Menu Supply Chain Monitoring /SAPAPO/AMON1 - Alert Monitor
Choose Maintain profile.
Under the Appl column on the left side of the screen, select the VS.
VehSched alert profile: VSAP-##
Description: VS Alert Profile Gr ##
Select the "check boxes" for the following alerts:
Check Availability. Order due date changed by Vehicle Scheduling
Order not planned in Transportation Planning
No Carrier Found
Handling or transportation resource overloaded
Optimizer: No transport created
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-65
1-2 Create an Optimization Profile for inbound shipments:
SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current
Settings Transportation Optimization S_AP9_75000203 - Define Optimization Profile
Optimization Profile: OPIN-##
Select Create.
Description: INBOUND SHPMNTS - GR ##
Under the Planning Data tab:
Select With no depot locations.
In the Transfer requirements section:
Select Multiple selections.
In the Demand Horizon section:
Select the Fixed Horizon.
Enter End time: 23:59:00.
Leave the date fields blank.
Select the Demand Categories tab.
In the All remnts categ box, select the following:
AH, BF, BI, BR, BV
Select the single arrowhead pointing to the left.
Select the Target loc. tab:
In the All target locs section, select locations:
10##, 22##
Choose Back.
Select the General Techn. Settings tab:
Enter: Cost profile: GRP##
Runtime optimization: 60
Choose Save.
1-4 Run the Consistency Check on your inbound profile. If there are any errors you
Model: 000
Profile: OPIN-##
1-5 Create an Optimization Profile for outbound shipments:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-66
SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current
Settings Transportation Optimization S_AP9_75000203 - Define Optimization Profile
Optimization Profile: OPOUT-##
Select Create.
Description: OUTBOUND SHPMNTS - GR ##
Under the Planning Data tab:
Select With no depot locations.
In the Transfer requirements section:
Select Multiple selections.
In the Demand Horizon section:
Select Fixed Horizon.
Enter End time: 23:59:00.
Leave the date fields blank.
Select the Demand Categories tab.
In the All remnts categ box, select the following:
BM, BQ, BR, BX, EQ
Select the Target loc. tab:
In the All target locs section, select locations:
10##, 12##, 22##, 25##
Choose Back.
Select the General Techn. Settings tab:
Enter: Cost profile: GRP##
Runtime optimization: 60
Choose Save.
1-6 Run the Consistency Check on your outbound profile. If there are any errors you
Model: 000
Profile: OPOUT-##
1-7 Create an optimization profile variant and conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling
optimization run for inbound shipments:
APO SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning
/SAPAPO/VS01 - Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-67
1-7-1 Create a variant for the selection screen of your optimization profile:
Enter the Optimization profile: OPIN-##
Choose Enter.
Selection period: Enter Start date: Today's date
Enter End date: Today's date + 8 weeks
Planning area:
Select the Multiple selection icon.
Select the Ranges tab.
Enter on one line: 1st col.: G##-FTRK01
2nd col: G##-FTRK05
Enter on next line: 1st col.: G##-LTRK01
2nd col: G##-LTRK05
Select the Copy icon.
Choose Save.
In the ABAP:Save as variant screen:
Enter OPIN-## as the Variant name.
Enter OPIN-## as the Description.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-68
1-7-2 Select the "Execute" button.
On the Vechicle Scheduling screen you should see the purchase order that
you created in the Transfer of Transaction Data unit listed at the bottom of
the Tabular planning section.
You should also see a list of your resources on the left side (the Shuffler
area).
Answer the questions in the Exercise.
Select VS Optimizer.
The TP/VS Optimizer screen will display.
Select Execute.
The Optimizer will run and you should see messages appear in the
Optimizer box and you should get one shipment created.
Select Confirm button (green check mark).
Select Alert monitor.
Record any alert messages.
Select Shipments in the Shuffler area.
You should see your planned shipment.
Double-click on it to bring the data into the Tabular planning area.
Review the data on the lines that are displayed.
Select the Overview Plng Board.
Use Zoom to enlarge the viewing area.
Right-click on the Date heading area.
Select the Daily view.
Scroll to the shipment data in the view.
Notice the resource graphic corresponding to the shipment.
Select the Obj. plng board.
What is the difference between the two planning boards?
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-69
Select the Details tab.
What is the Source location? _______________________
What is the Target location? _______________________
Distance: _______________________
Overall Status: _______________________
Carrier Number: _______________________
What is the resource assigned? _______________________
Choose Save.
1-8 Create an optimization profile variant and conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling
optimization run for outbound shipments:
1-8-1 Create a variant for the selection screen of your optimization profile:
Enter the Optimization profile: OPOUT-##
Choose Enter.
Selection period: Enter Start date: Today's date
Enter End date: Today's date + 8 weeks
Planning area:
Select Multiple selection.
Select the Ranges tab.
Enter on one line: 1st col.: G##-FTRK01
2nd col: G##-FTRK05
Enter on next line: 1st col.: G##-LTRK01
2nd col: G##-LTRK05
Select the Copy icon.
Choose Save.
In the ABAP:Save as variant screen:
Enter OPOUT-## as the Variant name.
Enter OPOUT-## as the Description.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-70
1-8-2 Select the Execute button.
On the Vechicle Scheduling screen you should see the sales orders and stock
transport that you created in the Transfer of Transaction Data unit listed at
the bottom of the Tabular planning section.
You should also see a list of your resources on the left side (the Shuffler
area).
1-8-3 To demostrate that a shipment can be created manually:
Select one of the LTL resources listed in the Shuffler area by double-
clicking on it. The resource name should appear in the Title bar.
Select the button to the left of the Sales order with the single line-item.
Select Assign order in the toolbar of the unassigned area.
The Transportation Scheduling Specifications for Scheduling box will be
displayed next. You could enter scheduling date information here, if desired.
Select the Choose icon (green check mark).
A message box will be displayed. Choose Continue.
The planned shipment will be created.
Select Shipments in the Shuffler.
Select the planned shipment you just created.
Select Release shipment in the toolbar above the shipment line.
1-8-4 Select the VS Optimizer button.
The TP/VS Optimizer screen will display.
The Optimizer will run and you should see messages appear in the
Optimizer box and you should get two shipments created.
Select Confirm button (green check mark).
Select Alert monitor.
Record any alert messages.
Select Shipments in the Shuffler area.
You should see your planned shipments.
Double mouse-click on one of the shipments to bring it's data into the
Tabular planning area.
Review the data on the lines that are displayed.
Select the Overview Plng Board.
Use Zoom to enlarge the viewing area.
Right-click on the Date heading area.
Select the Daily view.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-71
Scroll to the shipment data in the view.
Notice the resource graphic corresponding to the shipment.
Select the Obj. plng board.
What is the difference between the two planning boards?
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
What is the Source location? _______________________
What is the Target location? _______________________
Distance: _______________________
Overall Status: _______________________
Carrier Number: _______________________
What is the resource assigned? _______________________
Choose Save.
1-8-5 Release the shipments:
Select Shipment in the shuffler.
Select all of the planned shipments in the list.
The status of each shipment should be changed to Published.
1-8-5 Perform manual Carrier Selection.
Select all of the Published shipments.
Select Carrier Selection.
In the Carrier profile dialog box:
Select Carrier number.
Enter 0000001058 in the Carrier Number field.
Select Execute.
You should get amessage that carrier selection was performed successfully.
What is the Overall status?
___________________________________________________
What is the Carrier number? ___________________________
1-8-7 Choose Save.
1-8-8 Perform the "publishing" process by first transferring the delivery data:
APO SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
Environment /SAPAPO/VS50 - Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation
In the Selection box, enter a selection date that is Today's date + 6 weeks.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-72
In the list of orders displayed, SELECT ONLY YOUR ORDERS.
Select Publish orders.
Check the Log. Your orders should have been transferred.
Choose Back.
1-8-9 Perform the Check Release of Planned Shipments process:
Environment /SAPAPO/VS52 - Check Release of Planned Shipments
The Display Log should have your shipments listed.
Choose Back.
1-8-10 Perform the transfer of shipment data to the R/3 System:
Environment /SAPAPO/VS51 - Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP
System
In the Selection of shipments for transfer box, enter a date that is today's
date + 6 weeks.
Select Execute.
SELECT ONLY YOUR SHIPMENTS FOR TRANSFER!!!
Select the Publish orders button.
The Display log should list your shipments as being transferred,
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-73
1-8-11 Display the R/3 delivery and shipment data that was generated during the
publishing process:
R/3 SAP Menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order
VA02 Change
In the Search criteria field: Sold-to party enter: T-S11A##
Select the Search button.
Select your order.
Choose Enter.
From the Sales Order Overview screen, place the cursor in the Sold-to party
field.
Choose: Environment Display document Flow
In document flow, select the shipment document.
Go to the Shipment document overview screen and:
Verify the carrier assignment: ______________
Verify the Stages: ______________
What is the Shipment Type?: ______________
What is the Trans.Pl.Point?: ______________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-74
Solutions

Topic: Using Transportation Zone Hierarchies
2-1 To establish a transportation zone hierarchy, there are three relevant customizing
tables:
2-1-1 Define Hierarchy Structure at:
APO IMG Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Master Data
Hierarchy Define Hierarchy Structure
2-1-2 Define the Hierarchy at:
APO IMG Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Master Data
Hierarchy Define Hierarchy
2-1-3 Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy at:
APO IMG Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation
Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain
Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy
2-1-4 Display the Transportation Hierarchy Zone master data table:
APO SAP menu Master Data /SAPAPO/SCCRELHSHOW
Hierarchy
Hierarchy: TZONE
Select the Display Hierarchy objects button.
Drill down in zones: DE-D000060000
DE-D000070000
DE-D000080000
Verify that your customers are in these zones.
2-1-5 Create four sales orders:
R/3 SAP Menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order
VA01- Create
Enter and save the sales orders.
Record the document numbers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 11-75
2-1-6 Run Interactive Planning:
Planning /SAPAPO/VS01 - Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
Use your variant OPOUT-18.
When running the VS Optimizer, record your number of shipments planned
and the total optimized costs.
2-1-7 Display the transportation lanes:
APO SAP Menu Master Data /SAPAPO/SCC_TL1 - Transportation
Lanes
Display transportation Lane:
Source: 12##
Target: DE-D00006000
Change transportation Lane:
Source: DE-D000060000
Target: DE-D000060000
Update the lane with your Transportation Methods:
FTL##
LTL##
2-1-8 Run Interactive Planning:
Use your variant OPOUT-18.
When running the VS Optimizer, record your number of shipments planned
and the total optimized costs.
2-1-9 Choose Save.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
! The Carrier Selection process
! Customizing activities related to Carrier Selection
Carrier Selection
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
! Make the required customizing settings related
to carrier selection
! Perform carrier selection for planned
shipments
Carrier Selection: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
! After completing the shipment planning process,
the PC manufacturer wants to use the TP/VS carrier
selection process to automatically assign freight
carriers to the planned shipments.
Carrier Selection: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Carrier Tendering Releasing Shipments
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Optimization
Vehicle Scheduling)

" The Carrier responsible for transporting the shipment is selected after the shipment and its deliveries
are determined in Optimization and Scheduling. Carrier selection is performed through specific rules
in APO or through private/public exchanges in the R/3 System.
" Rules-based carrier selection is based on the lowest total cost, highest priority, or pre-defined
business share amongst the eligible carriers. These rules are stored in the Carrier Optimization
Profile.
" Carrier selection does not need to be performed in APO, but can be manually completed in the R/3
system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Manual
Selection
Single
Assignment
Continuous
Move
Priority Costs Business Share Freight Exchange
Automatic
Selection
Carrier
Selection

" Carrier selection provides a number of methods that are used to assign a carrier to a shipment:
$ Manual Selection: A carrier is assigned to the selected shipments manually.
$ Automatic Selection: This process can be performed interactively or in a background process
using a Carrier Selection profile to direct the assignment of the carrier to shipments.
" If only one carrier is available for selection for the transport (only one carrier is maintained for the
transportation lane), this carrier is assigned (single assignment).
" In the continuous move scenario a carrier is selected to provide transportation services for more leg
in a transportation itinerary. In a continuous move the selected carrier transports goods to a location
and then picks up goods to transport to another location(s).
" The checks for single assignment and continuous move occur before the selection strategies of the
Carrier Profile are taken into account.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
Manual Carrier Selection
2. Carrier Selection
1. Selection
3. Enter Carrier

" In manual carrier selection, the following steps apply:
$ Select the planned shipment(s)
$ Select the Carrier Selection button
$ Enter the Carrier in the dialog box
" If a carrier is selected manually, one or more shipments have to be selected using the Shipment view.
You can also perform Carrier Selection by clicking the right mouse button and choosing Carrier
selection. You can assign a carrier directly without checking or, after selecting a carrier selection
profile, you can select according to the strategy defined in the profile.
" A carrier is removed from a shipment by selecting the shipment and then clicking the right mouse
button and selecting Remov. carrier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
Automatic Carrier Selection
1. Select Shipment
2. Carrier Selection
3. Enter Carrier Selection
Profile
4. Select Log

" Use a Carrier Profile with automatic carrier selection to direct the system when determining the
shipments carrier.
" Select the log option when automatic carrier selection is used.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
! Defines Run/Selection Boundaries
" Model/Version
" Time Horizon (for selection of shipments)
" Locations
" Vehicles
" Transportation Mode
" Selection Criteria (4)
Carrier Profile

" All selected shipments will get a carrier according to the carrier selection profile when using
automatic Carrier Selection from interactive planning.
" You can also perform automatic carrier selection as a background process.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Profile: Carr.sel.
The Demand Horizon
section is only used
in background
processing
Maximum optimizer runtime

" In the Carr. Sel tab:
$ The Planning version is entered.
$ Fields in the Demand Horizon section are only used in automatic carrier selection in background
processing. Demand Horizon in the Carrier Profile does not have to be the same as the Demand
Horizon in the Optimization Profile.
$ The Carrier runtime is the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that the optimizer is to use in
selecting a carrier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-10
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Profile: Planning Data
These fields are
relevant only for
background
processing

" In the Planning data tab:
$ Use Selected source location to select the shipments for background carrier selection based on the
source location of the shipments.
$ Use Means of Transport to select shipments in background carrier selection processing, based on
the Transportation Method assigned to the vehicle resource assigned to the shipment by the
optimizer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-11
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Profile: Selection criteria
Order in which
strategies are used
R/3 System
Costing
Use Transportation lane costs

" Use the Selection strategies to direct the optimizer in choosing a carrier for the selected shipments.
Use any or all of them in carrier selection.
" When using the Costs or Business Share selection strategies, you must select a cost location; either
costs from the R/3 System (OLTP) (external costs) or costs stored in the transportation lane (internal
costs).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-12
! SAP AG 2002
! Selection criteria for choosing a Carrier is ranked
according to any combination of the following:
" Priority (assigned to Carrier by lane and type/method)
" Business Share (quota arrangements between Carriers)
" Freight Cost (internal costs or actual costs calculated by the
execution system)
" Freight Exchange (Internet exchange for bidding)
Selection Strategies

" Costs: The carrier is selected by determining the least total cost for the shipment. The costs are
determined by using either the internal costs defined in the Carrier data assigned to the
Transportation Lanes or external costs by querying the transportation freight costs in the R/3 System
Logistics Execution application. The total cost is determined for each carrier that has rates set for the
shipments transportation lanes or from the external system.
" Priority: The carrier is selected by the highest priority on the lane of transportation. The priority is
stored on the transportation lane by carrier.
" Business Share: The carrier is selected based on the business share maintained for the carrier. The
percentage of shipments each carrier receives for a time period (day, week, and month) is based on
the maintained percentage on the transportation lane. The actual values come from the maintained
planning book.
" Private/Public Exchange: Private/Public Exchange is possible in the R/3 System. Enter a carrier in
APO. The necessary information for the Private/Public Exchange is in the R/3 System..
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-13
! SAP AG 2002
Functionality of Automatic Carrier Selection
Single
Assignment
%Only one carrier to choose
Continuous
Move
Priority
%Explicit priorities
Costs
% Internal Costs (Lane)
%External Costs (R/3)
Business
Share
% Maintained on Lane
Freight
Exchange
%Private/Public Exchanges (R/3)
1. Level 2. Level

" Remarks for the use of external costs:
$ To determine the costs maintained in the R/3 System the transportation planning point must be
maintained.
$ A default shipping point must be maintained in the R/3 System.
$ In the table /SAPAPO/VS_ECUST the flag CS_EXT_COST_SKIP can be set. Before doing this,
review OSS note 501352!
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-14
! SAP AG 2002
Strategy of the Direct Lane
Point A
Plant
Point B
Customer
Point C
Customer
Point D
Customer
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Carrier 3
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Carrier 3
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Carrier 4 Carrier 4
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Carrier 5

" Example: A transport travels from A via B and C to D. The system checks which transportation
service providers cover all sections of the transport (A to B, B to C, C to D). The strategy of the
direct lane (A to D) is then applied for the possible carriers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-15
! SAP AG 2002
Intra-zone Lanes and Carrier Selection
! A transportation service provider can also be maintained
for a transportation relationship of this kind.
! This intra-zone lane is only taken into account if the
transport travels only within the transportation zone.
! It is not taken into account in these two cases:
" If a carrier comes against an external
transportation zone,it is assumed
that it also runs within the
transportation zone.
" If a carrier leaves a transportation
zone and goes external, it is assumed
that it also runs within the
transportation zone.
Intra-zone
lane

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-16
! SAP AG 2002
Continuous Move
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
Consideration
of maximum

" The Continuous Move setting manages whether a carrier arriving at a point of destination after
having finished a shipment accepts a complete new shipment, starting from this point of destination.
" Requirements:
$ The previous shipment has to be assigned to the respective carrier.
$ When there are two or more carriers to select, the assignment is done
by selection criteria (without consideration of the minimum).
" Settings for Continuous Move:
$ APO: SAP Menu: Master Data Location Location; Tab Carrier
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-17
! SAP AG 2002
Quotation of Shipments
Single
Assignment
Maximum is
considered
Continuous
Move
Maximum is
considered
Priority
Minimum - Maximum
Costs
Minimum - Maximum
Business
Share
Minimum - Maximum
1. Level 2. Level
- Quotation has to be
maintained - Actual Values
- Allocation of Minimum
is at optimal costs
Selection criteria Costs > Selection criteria Business Share

" The allocation of quotas is above the selection strategies of the carrier selection profile. The
strategies always occur under consideration of the allocations.
" For the Business Share strategy the allocation must be maintained. Actual values are required!
" During allocation, the following characteristics are used:
$ Transportation allocation object
$ Start location
$ Target location
$ Carrier
$ Means of transport
" The following key figures are used:
$ Maximum
$ Minimum
$ Actual value
" The maximum of the maintained allocation of quotas is taken into account during the manual
assignment of a carrier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-18
! SAP AG 2002
Business Share Configuration
! To use the Business Share Carrier Selection strategy:
1. Create a Planning Area and Planning Book in Demand
Planning
2. In TP/VS Carrier Selection customizing:
a. Create a Product Allocation Object, Group, and
Procedure
b. Assign the Product Allocation Procedure to the
Planning Area
3. Assign the Product Allocation Procedure to the Carriers
4. Perform the initial load of the Min-Max number of
shipments data for each carrier from the transportation
lanes

" The Business Share carrier selection strategy is based on the number of carrier shipments. A
minimum and maximum number of shipments that a carrier can tender is the basic selection criteria.
" Customizing activities create in APO a way to track the number of shipments a carrier has made in a
time period. The time period is configurable (day, week, or month).
" The minimum and maximum number of shipments are set for a carrier within a transportation lane,
by transportation method.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-19
! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Selection
Carrier Tendering Releasing Shipments
Create/Transfer
Deliveries
Configuration
Create/Transfer
Shipments
Optimization
Vehicle Scheduling)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-20
! SAP AG 2002
View
Create
Shipment
Publish
Release
for
Execution
Accept / Decline
Business Scenario:
Internet Tendering
Business Scenario:
Internet Tendering
Business Scenario:
Internet Tendering
Business Scenario:
Internet Tendering
Front end
XML
EDI
HTML
Service Agent
Service Agent
Transportation Planner
Transportation Planner
TP/VS Tendering
Front end

" Collaborative Transportation Planning between shippers and their carriers allows both partners to
streamline work processes and ultimately benefit from reduced handling costs, greater transparency,
and efficiency.
" Shippers can inform their carriers about their shipment plans, and the carriers can accept, reject or
change shipment requests. For example, the carrier could suggest an alternate pickup or delivery
date.
" This process begins after all the prerequisites are fulfilled. Tendering is possible via EDI, fax,
Internet, or a similar method of communication.
" Once planned shipments are released in APO, a tendering announcement is created.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-21
! SAP AG 2002
APO
TP/VS
APO
TP/VS
Carrier
system
Carrier
system
Execution if offer accepted
1
1
2
2
S
e
n
d

o
f
f
e
r
s
t
o

c
a
r
r
i
e
r
v
i
a
E
D
I
4
4
A
c
c
e
p
t
o
r

d
e
n
y

o
f
f
e
r
s
v
i
a
E
D
I
Vehicle
Scheduling
CARRIER SHIPPER
Transportation
Planner
3
3
Review
offered
shipments
R/3 R/3
Alert if
offer denied
5
5
Transportation
Planner
5
5
Collaborative Transportation Planning: EDI

" The transportation planner executes shipment planning using APO TP/VS and makes a carrier
selection, either manually or via a VS optimization run.
" A shipment request is sent to the carrier via EDI using IDOC PLNSHP.
" The carrier reviews the request and either accepts or rejects it via EDI. The carrier can also change a
pickup or delivery date and time for each stage of the shipment request.
" If the shipment request was rejected or modified, the shippers transportation planner is notified via
the APO Alert Monitor. The planner can then select another carrier via carrier selection.
" If the shipment request was accepted, APO TP/VS issues a shipment order for execution in the R/3
System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-22
! SAP AG 2002
Bidding Alerts
!Proposed delivery date changed by external carrier
!Proposed shipment declined by external carrier
!Proposed delivery date already in execution changed by
external carrier
!Proposed shipment already in execution declined by
external carrier

" Bidding Alerts are generated during the tendering process between APO TP/VS and external
carriers. After the APO VS run, the shipment proposals are transmitted to external carriers.
Sometimes they are transmitted to the execution system (R/3) before confirmation from the external
carrier arrives. In this case,, the system also triggers an execution system alert if there is a change or
a rejection.
" Configure Bidding Alerts using the Alert Monitor. They are configured in the VS Alert Profile.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-23
! SAP AG 2002
New tendering process after declination

" You can get an alert after declination of a shipment. Right-click on the generated alert and you can
offer this shipment to a new carrier or to the same carrier who was previously chosen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-24
! SAP AG 2002
APO
TP/VS
APO
TP/VS
Carrier
system
Carrier
system
Execution if offer accepted
2
2
I
n
f
o
r
m

c
a
r
r
i
e
r
(
v
i
a
e
-
m
a
i
l
)
4
4
A
c
c
e
p
t
o
r

d
e
n
y

o
f
f
e
r
s
Vehicle
Scheduling
CARRIER SHIPPER
Transportation
Planner
Internet
3
3
Review
offered
shipments
R/3 R/3
Alert if
offer denied
5
5
Transportation
Planner
3
3
Get shipment
details via XML
5
5
Collaborative Transportation Planning: Internet
1
1

" The transportation planner at the shippers site plans shipments using APO TP/VS and makes a
carrier selection, either manually or via a VS optimization run.
" The planner then sends a hyperlink via e-mail to a Web page with the current shipment requests.
" The carrier reviews the shipment requests in the Internet and either accepts or rejects them. The
carrier can also change a pickup or delivery date and time for each stage of a shipment request.
Furthermore, the carrier can display an XML file with all details of the shipment request by clicking
on the shipment number. The XML file can be displayed in a carrier-specific layout that is
maintained in the APO partner settings.
" If a shipment request was rejected or modified, the shippers transportation planner is notified via the
APO Alert Monitor. The planner can then select another carrier via carrier selection.
" If the shipment request was accepted, APO TP/VS issues a shipment order for execution in the R/3
System.
" Tendering can occur automatically or at the discretion of the shipper, but only after the shipment is
released in APO.
" Collaboration for Tendering via the Web requires an Internet Transaction Server (ITS) with the
Collaborative HTML Templates installed

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-25
! SAP AG 2002
Three Step Process
1) Create a Collaboration Partner
Identify Carrier
2) Set Communication Settings
Application Type (Transportation Planning)
E-Mail Activation/Information
XML Indicator/Stylesheet
3) Assign Users to Collaboration Partner
Identify System Users
Collaboration Configuration (Tendering)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-26
! SAP AG 2002
Shipment Details in a Carrier-Specific Layout
! The following customizing settings are relevant to view the
XML file with the shipment details in the transportation
collaboration scenario :
1. Maintain a collaboration partner and assign the user of the
external transportation partner to this partner (transaction
/SAPAPO/CLP_SETTINGS).
2. Maintain the collaboration scenario Transportation Planning
for this partner. Make sure, that you selected the XML
Displayed Activated indicator.
3. As the XML file is based on shipment information derived
from the IDOC PLNSHP, complete your customizing with the
necessary settings for the EDI scenario for Collaborative
Transportation Planning.

" Note: The IDOC generation is only required for the XML display. In the IDOC partner profile
(transaction /WE20) you should define a receiver port with a physical directory located on your own
application server.
" There is a default XSLT stylesheet that can be modified by the customer in the directory
../MIMES/CLPGLOBAL/99/STYLE/plnshp.xsl.
" The URL for the XML style sheet is:
http://<server>:<port>/sap/ist/mimes/clpglobal/99/style/plnshp.xsl
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-27
! SAP AG 2002
! Make the required customizing settings related
to carrier selection
! Perform carrier selection for planned shipments
Carrier Selection: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-28
Exercises

Unit: Carrier Selection
Topic: Carrier Profile

Create a Carrier profile and use it to perform carrier selection.

After the planning of one or more shipments, carrier selection can
be performed to either manually or automatically assign a carrier
to each shipment. In the project role, you must test this function.
1-1 Three carriers have already been created in APO for your use:
0000001058
0000001925
0000001930
The first thing you must do is assign the carriers to the transportation methods in
the transportation lanes where they will be used.
1-1-1 Assign these carriers to your transportation methods: FTL## and LTL## in
transportation lanes:
12## T-S11B##
12## T-S11C##
Set the internal costs of the carriers as follows:
Carrier: 0000001058 LTL rate is .900 per KM
Carrier: 0000001058 FTL rate is .750 per KM
Carrier: 0000001925 FTL rate is .800 per KM
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-29
1-2 Create a Carrier Selection Profile:
Use the following settings to create your profile:
Carr. profile: GR##
Description: Carrier Selection Gr. ##
Planning version: 000
Under the Carr. sel tab:
Set the Fixed Horizon:
Start date: Today's Date
Time: 00:00:00
End date: Today's Date + 8 weeks
Time: 23:59:00
Carrier runtime: 60 sec.
Under the Planning data tab:
Set All locations
Set All vehicles
Under the Sel. criteria tab:
Set the Selection strategies as follows:
Priority: Leave blank
Costs: 1 Select: Internal costs
Business Share: Leave blank
Freight exchange: Leave blank
Choose Save.
1-3 Create two sales orders:
Sales Document Type: OR
Sold-to: T-S11B##
P.O.Number: 13-1-##
Document Number: _______________________
Sold-to: T-S11C##
P.O.Number: 13-2-##
T-ATD3-## 50 PC
Document Number: _______________________
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-30
1-4 Run the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling for the sales orders.
How many shipments were created? _______________________
1-4-1 Select each shipment created and perform Carrier Selection using your
Carrier Selection profile, GR##.
1-4-2 What carrier was assigned to the order for T-S11B##?
___________________________________________
1-4-3 What carrier was assigned to the order for T-S11C##?
___________________________________________
1-5 Freight rates have been set up in the R/3 System for the three carriers. Change your
Carrier Selection profile to selct the carriers based on "External" costs.
1-5-1 Change your CS profile, GR##.
1-5-2 Return to Interactive Vehicle Scheduling and select the planned shipments
that were created in 1-4 and perform Carrier Selection. Select the "log"
option on the selection screen.
Did the results of the carrier selection change? ____________
In the Appendix is a copy of the freight rates established in the R/3 System.
Use them to verify that the correct carrier was selected.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-31
Solutions

Unit: Carrier Selection
Topic: Carrier Profile
1-1 Update the Transportation Methods within the transportation lanes with the carrier
information:
APO SAP Menu Master Data /SAPAPO/SCC_TL1 - Transportation Lanes
1-1-1 Update each transportation lane:
Model name: 000
Source loc.: 12##
Target loc.: T-S11B##
Select Change.
In the means of trans. section, select your FTL##.
Select the Carrier assignment icon (the truck) in the toolbar.
The bottom section of the screen will now become the Carrier for transport
type FTL## area.
Select the Creation of new entry icon in the toolbar.
The Carrier detail box will open up on the right side of the screen. You
might have to resize the left side of the window to see all of the data fields
in the detail box.
Create the carrier entry:
Enter the Carrier location number.
Enter the rate for the carrier in the Carrier costs (per KM) field.
Select Copy at the top of the screen.
Enter the second and third carriers for the Transportation Method.
After completing the entry for the third carrier, select Copy and close.
Select the next Transportation Method, LTL## and repeat the process for
the carriers and their rates for this method.
Choose Save after all data has been entered for the lane.
Perform this process for the next transportation lane.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-32
1-2 Create your Carrier Selection profile.
APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation
Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Carrier Selection Define Carrier
Profile
Enter Carr. profile: GR##
Select Create.
Enter the Carrier Profile Description: Carrier Selection GR. ##
Carr. sel. tab:
Enter Horizon (fixed) dates data.
Set the Carrier runtime: 60
Planning data tab:
Make no entries here.
Sel. criteria tab:
Set the Selection strategies as follows:
Priority: Leave blank
Costs: 1 Select: Internal costs
Business Share: Leave blank
Freight exchange: Leave blank
Choose Save.
1-3 Create two sales orders:
R/3 SAP Menu: Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Order VA01
Create
Enter the two sales orders based on the data in the Exercises section. After saving a
document, record its number in the Exercise section.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-33
1-4 Run the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling for the sales orders:
On the Vehicle Scheduling Selection screen, select your variant OPOUT-18 by
selecting the Get variant... icon.
Select Execute.
Lock all sales/delivery documents except the two that you just created. To Lock a
sales/delivery document, select it, then select the Do not optimize order icon (it's
the padlock).
Select VS Optimizer.
Select Execute Optimization.
After the optimization run completes:
Select Confirm.
Select Shipments in the shuffler.
Select one of the shipments created for your sales orders by double-clicking on it.
Select Carrier selection in the application toolbar.
When the Carrier Profile dialog box displays, enter your Carrier Selection profile
and select the Log checkbox.
Select Execute.
After a few seconds, you should get a message Carrier selection completed
successfully.
Double-click on the shipment for which carrier selection was just performed.
Select the Details tab on the right-side of the screen and find the assigned carrier.
Repeat the carrier selection process for the remaining shipment related to your
second sales order.
1-5 Modify your carrier selection profile to use the external costs in the R/3 System and
rerun carrier selection for your two shipments:
1-5-1 Update your carrier profile:
APO IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Transportation
Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Carrier Selection Define
Carrier Profile
Enter Carr. profile: GR##
Select Change.
Select the Sel. criteria tab.
In the Costs selection strategy, select External costs.
Choose Save.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
(C) SAP AG SCM612 12-34
1-5-2 In interactive vehicle scheduling, rerun your carrier selection and review the
results.
On the Vehicle Scheduling Selection screen, select your variant OPOUT-
18 by selecting the Get variant icon.
Select Execute.
Select Shipments in the shuffler.
Select one of the shipments created for your sales orders by double-clicking
on it.
Select Carrier selection in the application toolbar.
When the Carrier Profile dialog box displays, enter your Carrier Selection
profile and select the Log checkbox.
Select Execute.
After a few seconds, you should get a message Carrier selection completed
successfully.
Double-click on the shipment for which carrier selection was just
performed.
Select the Details tab on the right-side of the screen and find the assigned
carrier.
Repeat the carrier selection process for the remaining shipment related to
your second sales order.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
TP/VS: Additional Topics
Contents:
! Backorder Processing (BOP)
! Shipment and Transportation Scheduling
! Shipment scheduling

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
TP/VS: Additional Topics : Unit Objectives
! Explain the Back Ordering process and its
effect on TP/VS planning
! Explain the Shipment and Transportation
Process
! Explain the forms of scheduling related to
TP/VS

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
TP/VS: Additional Topics : Business Scenario
! Some functions that can play a role in the
planning process represent processes that
supplement TP/VS. Some functions and
features may be optional and not required
by every customer.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
What Does It Do?
Backorder Rescheduling/ Processing
It iss a redistribution of the available quantity of one or more
products using selected orders. Previous confirmation
of the orders involved are ignored and added
to the available quantity during rescheduling
Why Does It Effect Transportation Planning?
Redistribution of previously confirmed order quantities may
change the proposed delivery of Planned Shipments
generated by Vehicle Scheduling

" Backorder processing is essentially set to process entered requirements and to diagnose and cancel
backorder situations. A backorder situation can require the changing of confirmed quantities or dates
$ After a changed availability situation
$ After the arrival of priority orders
$ After a planning run in PP/DS or in SNP
$ After changes in the location-specific product master data for ATP
" The Backorder Processing (BOP) plays an important role within the Transportation Management
Solution for the Sales Order Fulfillment Process: when running BOP on sales orders which have
been consolidated previously by TP/VS, the scheduling is based on the given loading dates. With the
update of the orders into the R/3 System, the documents have the correct dates and times as defined
by the shipments activities.
" BOP is only possible for Sales Orders.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SORTER: Using Priorities
Backorder Processing and Scheduling (1)
Simulation
Interactive Post Processing
Posting of Results to R/3 or Legacy System
PP/DS Master Data SNP
Alert
Filter
Filter
NetChange
Filter
Backorder Processing (Interactive)
Backorder Processing (Batch)
A Monitor Individual
TP/VS
Load. Activity

" Two functions are available for processing backorders in SAP APO:
$ Batch Backorder Processing
$ Interactive Backorder Processing
" Batch BOP corresponds essentially to rescheduling in the R/3 System, though with enhanced
features:
$ The filter can be configured
$ The sort can be configured
$ The scheduling can be configured
" Backorder processing is used in Vehicle Scheduling to transfer data changed in Transportation
Planning back to SAP R/3. Transportation Planning must be based on the requested quantity and the
requested date.
" Process: (BOP ) TP/VS BOP Delivery
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Filter
" Alert Filter - All orders with:
% Available To Promise
% Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
" Net-Change-Filter - All orders changed through:
% Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
% Supply Network Planning runs
" Filter: There are 15 criteria to set up a filter:
% Product
% Location
% Order creation date
% And so on
! Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling:
External loading activities are considered

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Sorter
" The sorter is prioritizing the selected / filtered orders
" There are 15 priorities, including:
% Product
% Location
% Delivery prioritiy
% And so on
! Backorder Processing
" Interactive/Batch planning job
" Can read ATP Customizing (Check mode, and Allocation
procedure)
" Horizons for rescheduling
" Basic methods selection
" Rules selection can be switched off

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
ATP and Transportation Planning
ERP ERP
Global
APO
Local SCE
**
Local MS
*
Pick/Pack
Transport
Dispo
Load Transit UnLoad
Mat. Availability time
Loading time GI time Delivery time
Mat. Availability time
Transport Disposition Time
* MS = Manufacturing System
**SCE = Supply Chain Execution System
! Allocations for Transports
! Backorder Processing via
external Loading Activities

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Direct Update of Batch BOP
" Filter
" Sort
" Rejection of the
confirmed quantities
" ATP check
" New date/quantities
" The results are
always held in a
buffer.

Process:
" Carry out batch backorder processing to redistribute previously-confirmed quantities for the order
items of backorders, according to a list of priorities
" As long as the update in the connected OLTP system is not yet completed, the assigned quantities are
protected in APO as temporary quantity assignments.
" The changes are updated in the R/3 System.
" The update is confirmed to APO.
" You can delete the results in the buffer. These are only used as a log.
" If you have to define unforeseen short-term sales priorities, use interactive backorder processing
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-10
! SAP AG 2002
Batch BOP with Postprocessing
" Manually redistribute
confirmed quantities
of one or more
products
" Access via the
Product View
" Processing occurs at
schedule line level
" Dates of schedule
lines can be changed,
deleted, or created
" Role: ATP Controller

Purpose: You do not want to update the results of backorder processing directly, you want to carry out
an operative simulation first.
Prerequisite: Maintain the settings for backorder processing and have orders in APO.
Process:
" Set the parameter Execution mode with postprocessing on the tab page and carry out backorder
processing.
" The results are not updated immediately; rather, they are saved in a buffer.
" Call the results display to process the results. The assigned quantities are protected by temporary
quantity assignments.
" You can process the results via interactive backorder processing from the results list.
" You can update or reject the results afterwards.
" If necessary, delete the results list or the results in the buffer.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-11
! SAP AG 2002
Shipment and Transportation Scheduling
Shipment Scheduling
All processes that are necessary to initiate goods shipment
are included in shipment scheduling. These processes include
loading, picking, and packing. Shipment scheduling
determines the material availability date and loading start.
Transportation Scheduling
All deadlines that affect shipment preparation and execution
are included in transportation scheduling. These include
transportation lead time, transportation time, and the
unloading/loading time (for stock transfers). Transportation
scheduling uses the requested delivery date to determine the
goods issue deadline and the transportation planning
deadline. The possible delivery date is determined if the
system uses forward scheduling.

" You can specify a requested delivery date for each schedule line in an item when you enter an order.
The customer should receive the goods by this date. During order processing, the system can
automatically plan when the necessary shipment activities such as picking, loading, and
transportation must begin in order to stay on schedule for the requested delivery date.
" The system starts with the requested delivery date and schedules chronologically backwards. For this
reason, this process is called backward scheduling. The system determines the deadlines as follows:
$ Requested delivery date transportation time = Goods issue deadline
$ Goods issue deadline loading time = loading start
The planning date and the material availability date are determined based on the loading start.
$ Loading start planning lead time = planning date
$ Loading start pick/pack time = material availability date
$ If the system recognizes that the material availability date or the planning date fall in the past, it
automatically runs forward scheduling in order to determine a delivery date that can be confirmed.
" Note: If there is no material available on the material availability date, the SAP system can run an
availability check according to the system settings. The resulting material availability date is then
used as a basis for forward scheduling.
" Note: In a rules-based availability check, backward scheduling is carried out to determine the
material availability date for a location/product substitution, starting from the original requested
delivery date. This is necessary, since the substitution can influence the scheduling result (for
example, because of another transportation lane in location determination).
" Note: For scheduling to occur properly, the transportation zones and shipping conditions must be
copied from the SAP R/3 System into the SAP APO system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-12
! SAP AG 2002
Scheduling Process
APO R/3 Plug-In
Determine process
durations (cond.)
Calculate dates
and times
Create
sales order
Call
scheduling
Determine
process durations
Calculate
dates and times
Determine
process durations
Calculate
dates and times
Determine
process durations
Calculate
dates and times
Save
sales order
Delete
temporary quantity
assignments
Call
ATP
Check
ATP
Material
(Plant APO
relevant)
Material
(Plant
not APO
relevant)

" Start the process by creating a sales order. Enter the requested material, quantity, and delivery date.
" The R/3 System uses the order type to determine whether shipment scheduling or transportation
scheduling should be carried out. The following points are valid for order types for which scheduling
is requested.
" The R/3 System determines the plant for the material in each item. The CIF integration model
defines whether the availability check in the APO system is to be run for materials in this plant. If
this is the case, scheduling can also occur in the APO system.
$ Note: You mix items within a sales order whose availability is checked in the APO system and in
the R/3 System: Due to the various scheduling techniques, there can be considerable deviations
between the times calculated (the transit time, in particular). Functions involving several items,
such as complete delivery and delivery groups, are especially susceptible to such detrimental
effects.
" The material availability date is calculated either in the APO system or in the R/3 System for the
requested delivery date of an item.
" The system checks availability for material, plant, and quantity on the material availability date.
$ R/3 System or APO system: If the material availability date that was determined previously cannot
be confirmed, the system redetermines the process duration, recalculates the dates and times, adds
more schedule lines, and returns this information to the R/3 System. This normally occurs when
availability is found to be insufficient or when the material availability date lies in the past.
" Save the sales order.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-13
! SAP AG 2002
Schedules
1. Create a Transport Method (flag for Schedule has to be set)
2. Create a Vehicle Resource
3. Assign Vehicle Resource to Model/Planning Version
4. Assign Transport Method to Transportation Lane
5. Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs for Transport Methods
6. Maintain Itinerary
7. Assign Itinerary to active Model
8. Maintenance from here on for Scenario 1 or Scenario 2
Scenario 1: Departure at a fixed day of the week
(for example, every Monday)
Scenario 2: Departure in a predefined rhythm
(for example, every 10 days)

" IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) Supply Chain Engineer (SCE) Maintain
Transport Method
Relevant fields for maintenance of schedules are: Vehicle (= Transport Method), Transportation
Mode. and Schedule.
" SAP Menu: Master Data Resource; Tab Vehicle
The Schedule flag has to be set for the Vehicle Resource you have maintained at number one.
" Is done in the Supply Chain Engineer (SCE) or in Create-View of Resource Master Data.
" SAP Menu: Master Data Transportation Lanes or SAP Menu: Master Data Supply Chain
Engineer Maintain Model
The whole transport duration should be maintained here. To calculate the time of arrival, the
transport duration is added up to departure time.
" SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs
Schedules Maintain Itinerary
Schedules Maintain Itinerary (Initial Screen)
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-14
! SAP AG 2002
Schedules (Scenario 1)
1. Maintain Calendar
2. Maintain Schedule Validity Period
3. Maintain Schedule

" IMG: General Settings Maintain Calendar
$ Factory Calendar
$ Select Change
$ Create a new calendar
$ Enter Factory calendarID, name of calendar, Validity, and so on
$ Choose workdays which are relevant for departure
$ Save
" SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data of Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling
Schedules Maintain Schedule Validity Period
$ Press New Entries
$ Enter a name
$ Identify the calendar by enter the CalendarID
$ Maintain Validity
Schedules Maintain Schedule
$ Enter a name
$ Select Create
$ Enter Validity, Itinerary, Transportation Method, and name of Schedule Vehicle Resource
Enter time of departure and departure day
Choose Generate to create departure times and days on the basis of the maintained factory
calendar
$ The respective calendar has to be maintained to change departure times.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-15
! SAP AG 2002
Schedules (Scenario 2)
1. Maintain Calendar
2. Maintain Schedule Validity Period
3. Maintain Schedule; departure times have to be maintained
manually

" IMG: General Settings Maintain Calendar
$ Factory Calendar
$ Press Change
$ Create a new calendar
$ Enter Factory calendarID, name of calendar, Validity, and so on
Choose workdays which are relevant for departure
$ Save
Schedules Maintain Schedule Validity Period
$ Press New Entries
$ Enter a name
$ Assign a calendarID
$ Maintain Validity
Schedules Maintain Schedule
$ Enter a name
$ Press Create
$ Enter Validity, Itinerary, Transportation Method and name of Schedule Vehicle Resource
$ Enter departure times manually
$ To change departure times, the respective calendar has to be maintained
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-16
! SAP AG 2002
Schedules
When using Schedules in the Optimization, note the following:
! Loading/Unloading schedule vehicles is always estimated
at zero.
! Do not maintain any work breaks for schedule resources.
! Maintain calendars with seven working days per week for
schedule resources.
! Opening hours maintained for schedule-relevant locations
can result in you not being able to use the schedule
resource if the opening hours do not correspond to the
arrival/departure times.

" The travel time maintained in the schedule and the transport connections apply to the resource that is
assigned to the schedule.
$ Schedule A B C: Departure from location A at 10:00
$ Duration A B: three hours, duration B C: two hours
$ Arrival at B at 13:00; at C at 15:00
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 13-17
! SAP AG 2002
TP/VS: Additional Topics : Unit Summary
! Explain the Back Order process and its
impact on TP/VS planning
! Explain the Shipment and Transportation
Process
! Define the forms of scheduling in TP/VS

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! An overview of transportation content in BW
! An overview of Supply Chain Event Management
(SCEM)
TP/VS - Monitoring
Contents:

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Understand the basic reporting functionalties
in BW
! Understand the additional available
management tools in transportation planning
TP/VS Monitoring: Unit Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! The PC electronics manufacturer uses the BW Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs) as benchmarks to
measure transportation planning performance.
TP/VS Monitoring: Business Scenario

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SAP BW-Definition
SAP Business Information Warehouse ...
... is a collection, combination, and consolidation of
information, which supports further theme-orientated
analysis.
... delivers data to all enterprise Front-end-systems to support
the decision process for employees and managers.
... is physically separated from the datasources of the OLTP-
System and build up the connection to the OLTP-
system or any other data-providing-system for the purpose of
periodic full-data or delta-data upload.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Positioning of BW within the SAP Environment
E
n
te
rp
r
is
e
fr
o
n
tie
r
Working with Web-Browser
Portal
Industry-specific
role based
personalized
Drag & Relate
Portal
Industry-specific
role based
personalized
Drag & Relate
Market-
place
Market-
place
Single
sign-
on
3.1H
R/3 4.6
FI
FI
LO
LO
HR
HR
CRM
CRM
KM
KM
B2B
B2B
SEM
SEM
APO
APO
BW
BW
CFM
CFM
mySAP.com-Components
Open
Internet
standard
R/2
R/2
non mySAP.com
3rd
party
3rd
party
legacy legacy
Partner Partner
SAP
SAP
inside
outside
mySAP.com Internet Services Other Internet Services
Cock-
pits
Cock-
pits

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
SAP BW Replaces the R/3 Reporting System
" Integration of information from different source systems (open-
architecture)
" Stand-alone solution, with a very strong backend integration
" A system that is easy to handle for standard reporting and multidimensional
ad-hoc analysis (OLAP)
" Single point of entry
" All business content delivered by SAP BW is available in the Internet
" Take the load off the operating system and relieve the IT-organization
" High performance
" Quick installation and maintenance
Main Topics of BW

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
BW-Architecture

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Transfer
structure
OLTP
Syn. Data
Provider
Transfer
structure
Communication structure
Source system
InfoCube
InfoSource
Update rules
Mapping &
Transformationrules
Transformation,
Aggregation
Extraction
Updating
Workbook
Definition
Query
Analysis
Report
Role
Decision, preparation
Data Process Chain

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Queries
Web reports
Workbooks
Transfer rules
InfoObjects
Order Entry
Order Entry
Customer
Customer
InfoSources
Extractors
I
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l

A
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
i
z
a
t
i
o
n
InfoCubes
Roles
U
s
e
r

V
i
e
w
U
s
e
r
P
e
r
s
p
e
c
t
i
v
e
Standard analysis,
Ready-to-go solutions
Standard analysis,
Ready-to-go solutions
Standard Content,
Easy to Extend!
Maintenance through SAP
Standard Content,
Easy to Extend!
Maintenance through SAP
Possible Use of the Business Content
Best Practices

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-10
! SAP AG 2002
! Transportation Content available in BW 2.0B
Connection to the R/3 System for 4.0B and higher
! Infocubes:
# Freight Cost Overview
# Freight Cost Detail
# Shipment Header
# Shipment Stages
# Delivery Data of the Shipment Stages
Transportation Content In BW: Overview

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-11
! SAP AG 2002
Example: Freight Cost Reporting Overview (1)
! Key figures:
# Net Value Freight Costs
! Characteristics from:
# Transportation Header
# Stages
# Freight Cost Item
! Examples for Queries:
# Freight Costs per Carrier
# Freight Costs per Route

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-12
! SAP AG 2002
Example: Freight Cost Reporting Overview (2)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-13
! SAP AG 2002
KPIs for Distribution, Warehousing,
and Transportation
KPIs for Measuring:
Costs
Cycle Time
Service/Quality
Assets
Logistics Content: Outlook

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-14
! SAP AG 2002
Definition of Supply Chain Event Management
Supply Chain Event Management (SCEM)
is an application that supports control processes for
managing events within and between companies.
It consists of a set of integrated software functionality
that supports five business processes: monitor, notify,
simulate, control, and measure supply chain activities.
AMR Research, January 2000

# The goals of Supply Chain Event Management are:
% Optimize information flow in the supply chain within enterprises and with their business partners
% Improve the overview of the current status of the whole supply chain of an enterprise
% Improve forecast ability for critical events within the supply chain, allowing faster reaction times
% Automatic reaction to incoming event messages using Workflow triggers and data progression in
ERP systems
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-15
! SAP AG 2002
Regular
event
Types of Events and Tracking
Actual events
Expected events
Process milestones
Overdue
event
Event 2
Unexpected event
Event 2
Unreported event
Event 3
Event 4 Event 1
Event 1

# Tracking:
% Is gathering real time data for events, status, locations, and parties involved for elements in a
logistics process
# Can be used for warnings, messages, data progression, or follow-up processes when:
% Planned events occur
% Unforeseen events occur
% Planned events do not occur
- Shows a view of the current status and the history of a logistics objects (transport, container,
and so on)
- More economical operations by using the better overview of resources and capacities of
logistics partners
- Increases customer satisfaction through faster, more reliable service
# By releasing a shipment in APO TP/VS, an expected event for tendering this shipment is generated
in the Event Manager.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-16
! SAP AG 2002
SCEM Example: Procurement Process
Supplier
Event
Manager
SAP
System
Scenario:
An electronics manufacturer orders customer-specific
semiconductors in Malaysia.
Added Value:
The timely processing of the purchase order can be
monitored.
Singapore
Malaysia
Carrier
Carrier
Ordering
Party
Port of
Departure
Warehouse
Purchase
Order
Transfer
Order
Inb. Del.
PO
TO
RF Device
Goods Receipt
Quality Check
Availability
RF Device
Goods Receipt
Quality Check
Availability
EDI
Departure
ETA
Arrival
EDI
Departure
ETA
Arrival
EDI
Arrival
Import Documents
Loading Ship
EDI
Arrival
Import Documents
Loading Ship
Internet
Loading
Departure
Border Crossing
Arrival POL
Internet
Loading
Departure
Border Crossing
Arrival POL
Internet
Incoming Purchase Order
Start of Production
End of Production
Goods Issue
Internet
Incoming Purchase Order
Start of Production
End of Production
Goods Issue
EDI
Incoming Order
Scheduling Confirmation
Pickup POD
Inbound Delivery Warehouse

# SCEM can be used for whole processes. Procurement uses one single point of entry for its various
documents
# Many parties send events to the Event Manager using different ways of communication,such as the
Internet (Portals), EDI, Radio Frequency devices, and so on
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-17
! SAP AG 2002
SCEM Example: Tracking Pallets for Recall
Event
Manager
SAP
System
Crossdock
Pal 2,3.
Loading Point DC1
DC2
Customer
B
Customer
C
DC3
Tracking
Events
Pick-up
Pal.1,2,3
Dispatch
Pal 1
Dispatch
Pal 2,3
Dispatch
Pal 3
Crossdock
Pal 1,2,3.
POD
Pal 3
ALERT !
Batch on
PAL 1,2,3
contaminated !
ALERT !
Batch on
PAL 1,2,3
contaminated !
Locations
PAL 1: Shipped to DC 1
PAL 2: In DC 2
PAL 3: Delivered to Customer C
Locations
PAL 1: Shipped to DC 1
PAL 2: In DC 2
PAL 3: Delivered to Customer C
Customer
A

# Loading point and DC1 are managed by the vendor.
# DC2 and DC3 are third party managed. Here the process goes out of sight.
# Handling Unit Management produces good and creates tracking events.
# Tracking the pallets allows you to know where the pallets are at any given time.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-18
! SAP AG 2002
SCEM Scenario
Track
Production
Leave
manufacturing
site
Start Production
End Production
Gets informed via e-mail
and monitors production
progress
Load truck at dock
Process Operator starts
production uses PI-Sheets and
communication to process
control
Warehouse employee
confirmes loading
completion )
Truck driver confirmes
departure, delay, and arrival
using car mounted device
Customer Carrier
Manufacturer
Truck driver is informed about
pick up time via SMS
Track Shipment
Monitors shipment using
web access
Proof of delivery
Confirms correct delivery
of ordered ice cream

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-19
! SAP AG 2002
Embedded Status Reporting: Example

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-20
! SAP AG 2002
Process Automation
Process Automation
Valuation
Valuation
Alarm
Alarm
! ! Recalculation of arrival time Recalculation of arrival time
! ! Production rescheduling for late deliveries Production rescheduling for late deliveries
! ! Progressive run times Progressive run times
! ! Calculation of demurrage Calculation of demurrage
! ! Verification of completeness of the process steps Verification of completeness of the process steps
! ! Informs business Informs business
partners partners
! ! Displays alarms Displays alarms
monitor monitor
! ! Sets up trouble Sets up trouble
shooting shooting
! ! On time deliveries On time deliveries
! ! Average run time Average run time
! ! Uniform status messages Uniform status messages
! ! Last recorded status Last recorded status
! Customer service
Supply Chain Event Management actively supports
managing the logistics process of an enterprise as well as the business partners
A Few Application Scenarios for Event
Management

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-21
! SAP AG 2002
Rail
Sea
Parcel
Air
Road
Container
! Primarily used in transportation, but also usedfor upstream and
downstream processes
! Supply Chain Event Management offers generic services for
creating, saving, processing, and administrating status data
from a supply chain process
! Supply Chain Event Management is completely integrated with
mySAP.com
! Supply Chain Event Management supports all transport modes
SCEM: Scope and Integration

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

(C) SAP AG SCM612 14-22
! SAP AG 2002
! Understand the basic reporting functionalties in
BW
! Understand the additional available
management tools in transportation planning
TP/VS Monitoring: Unit Summary

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Use the TP/VS component of APO to plan both
inbound and outbound shipments
! Create the necessary integration models to
communicate data between an R/3 System and
the APO TP/VS component
! Make the necessary customizing settings
required to perform transportation planning,
vehicle scheduling, and carrier selection in the
TP/VS environment
! Describe the various monitoring tools available to
TP/VS
Course Objectives

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Recommended Follow-up Activities
! Read on-line documentation
! Read IMG documentation
! Read release notes
! Read OSS Notes

" Here are some of the most important TP/VS OSS notes:
362445 Effects on document changes in the R/3 System on APO shipments
379846 Vehicle Scheduling Order Category Selection
388499 Use of transportation zones
392302 Collective note for Transportation planning
397475 Use of charging functions
415477 Customizing for XML details in APO Coll. Transportation
445118 Functions of selection of carriers
448487 Transportation Planning: Integration of the R/3 and APO systems
483257 Own and external Transportation Methods
514897 Collective notes about Performance Optimization in TP/VS
Those notes are always updated.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
! Carrier Rates for Carrier Selection Exercise
! APO-R/3 CIF Troubleshooting Guide
! Tips and Tricks for APO CIF
! OSS Notes
Contents:
Appendix

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Carrier Rates for Carrier Selection Exercise

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

Freight Rates:
Condition Type: FB00
Key: Service Agent / TZ-Dep. / TZ-target

Gross Weight Scale Id: 3

Rates per 100 KG Currency: EUR
1058 0 500 1000 5000 10000 Cheaper: TL's
DE00-DE60 35 32 29 24 15
DE00-DE70 40 38 37 32 21
DE00-DE80 45 43 42 37 26

Rates per 100 KG
1930 0 500 1000 5000 10000 Cheaper: LTL's
DE00-DE60 34 31 28 23 19
DE00-DE70 38 36 35 30 22
DE00-DE80 43 41 40 35 28

Rates per 100 KG
1925 0 500 1000 5000 10000 Cheaper: DE70
DE00-DE60 37 34 30 26 20 DE80
DE00-DE70 35 33 32 27 19
DE00-DE80 41 39 37 33 23

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
Tips and Tricks for APO CIF

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l

U

s

e

S

A

P

P

a

r

t

n

e

r

O

n

l

y

! SAP AG 2002
OSS Notes

SCM612 - APO Transportation Planning - Vehicle Scheduling (TP-VS)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SCM612 - APO Transportation Planning - Vehicle Scheduling (TP-VS)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

I

are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX

are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

, World Wide Web

is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Вам также может понравиться